User Manual for PLANET models including: L4 Gigabit Ethernet Switch, L4, Gigabit Ethernet Switch, Ethernet Switch, Switch
User's Manual of 802.3bt PoE L2/L4 Gigabit Switch
15.12.2023 г. — used in accordance with the Instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is ...
Support - PLANET Technology
File Info : application/pdf, 380 Pages, 9.00MB
DocumentDocumentUser's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
8-Port 10/100/1000T 802.3bt PoE + 2-Port 100/1000X SFP M16a/n2a4g-PedorEt t1h0e/1rn0e0t/1S0w00itTch802.3bt PoE++ plus 4-Port Gigabit TP/SFP Combo 1M6a/2n4a-gPeodrtS1w0/i1tc0h0/1000T 802.3bt PoE++ plus 4-Port Gigabit TP/SFP Combo Managed Ethernet Switch GS-4210-8UP2S/ GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
1
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Trademarks
Copyright © PLANET Technology Corp. 2023. Contents are subject to revision without prior notice. PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp. All other trademarks belong to their respective owners.
Disclaimer
PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications, and makes no warranty and representation, either implied or expressed, with respect to the quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User's Manual is accurate; PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred.
Information in this User's Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET. PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User's Manual. PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User's Manual, and reserves the right to make improvements to this User's Manual and/or to the products described in this User's Manual, at any time without notice.
If you find information in this manual that is incorrect, misleading, or incomplete, we would appreciate your comments and suggestions.
FCC Warning
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
CE Mark Warning
This device is compliant with Class A of CISPR 32. In a residential environment this equipment may cause radio interference.
Energy Saving Note of the Device
This power required device does not support Standby mode operation. For energy saving, please remove the power cable to disconnect the device from the power circuit. In view of saving the energy and reducing the unnecessary power consumption, it is strongly suggested to remove the power connection for the device if this device is not intended to be active.
WEEE Warning
To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment, end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol. Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately.
Revision
PLANET 8-Port 10/100/1000T 802.3bt PoE + 2-Port 100/1000X SFP Managed Ethernet Switch & 16-/24-Port 10/100/1000T 802.3bt PoE++ plus 4-Port Gigabit TP/SFP Combo Managed Switch User's Manual FOR MODELS: GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4 /GS-4210-24UP4C REVISION: 3.1 (December, 2023)/Part No: EM-GS-4210-8UP2S_16UP4C_24UP4C_v3.0
2
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................. 11
1.1 Packet Contents .........................................................................................................................................12 1.2 Product Description ...................................................................................................................................12 1.3 How to Use This Manual ............................................................................................................................21 1.4 Product Features ........................................................................................................................................21 1.5 Product Specifications ..............................................................................................................................25
2. INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................... 33
2.1 Hardware Description ................................................................................................................................33 2.1.1 Switch Front Panel ..............................................................................................................................................33 2.1.2 LED Indications ...................................................................................................................................................35 2.1.3 Switch Rear Panel ...............................................................................................................................................38
2.2 Installing the Switch...................................................................................................................................39 2.2.1 Desktop Installation .............................................................................................................................................39 2.2.2 Rack Mounting.....................................................................................................................................................40 2.2.3 Installing the SFP transceiver ..............................................................................................................................41
3. SWITCH MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................... 44
3.1 Requirements..............................................................................................................................................44 3.2 Management Access Overview.................................................................................................................45 3.3 Administration Console .............................................................................................................................46 3.4 Web Management .......................................................................................................................................47 3.5 SNMP-based Network Management .........................................................................................................48 3.6 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility ..............................................................................................................48
4. WEB CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................................... 50
4.1 Main Web Page ...........................................................................................................................................52 4.1.1 Saving Configuration via the Web .......................................................................................................................54 4.1.2 Configuration Manager ........................................................................................................................................55
4.2 System.........................................................................................................................................................56 4.2.1 Management........................................................................................................................................................57 4.2.1.1 System Information....................................................................................................................................57 4.2.1.2 IP Configuration.........................................................................................................................................58
3
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.1.3 IPv6 Configuration .....................................................................................................................................59 4.2.1.4 User Configuration.....................................................................................................................................61 4.2.2 Time Settings.......................................................................................................................................................62 4.2.2.1 System Time..............................................................................................................................................62 4.2.2.2 SNTP Server Settings ...............................................................................................................................65 4.2.3 Log Management.................................................................................................................................................66 4.2.3.1 Logging Service.........................................................................................................................................66 4.2.3.2 Local Logging ............................................................................................................................................67 4.2.3.3 Remote Syslog ..........................................................................................................................................68 4.2.3.4 Logging Message ......................................................................................................................................70 4.2.4 SNMP Management ............................................................................................................................................72 4.2.4.1 SNMP Overview ........................................................................................................................................72 4.2.4.2 SNMP Setting ............................................................................................................................................73 4.2.4.3 SNMP Community .....................................................................................................................................74 4.2.4.4 SNMP View ...............................................................................................................................................75 4.2.4.5 SNMP Access Group.................................................................................................................................76 4.2.4.6 SNMP User................................................................................................................................................78 4.2.4.7 SNMPv1, 2 Notification Recipients ............................................................................................................80 4.2.4.8 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients ................................................................................................................81 4.2.4.9 SNMP Engine ID .......................................................................................................................................82 4.2.4.10 SNMP Remote Engine ID ........................................................................................................................83 4.2.5 RMON..................................................................................................................................................................84 4.2.5.1 RMON Overview........................................................................................................................................84 4.2.5.2 RMON Statistics ........................................................................................................................................84 4.2.5.3 RMON Event .............................................................................................................................................86 4.2.5.4 RMON Event Log ......................................................................................................................................87 4.2.5.5 RMON Alarm .............................................................................................................................................88 4.2.5.6 RMON History ...........................................................................................................................................91 4.2.5.7 RMON History Log ....................................................................................................................................92 4.2.6 Remote Management ..........................................................................................................................................92
4.3 Switching.....................................................................................................................................................94 4.3.1 Port Management ................................................................................................................................................96 4.3.1.1 Port Configuration......................................................................................................................................96 4.3.1.2 Port Counters ............................................................................................................................................98 4.3.1.3 Bandwidth Utilization ...............................................................................................................................102 4.3.1.4 Port Mirroring...........................................................................................................................................103 4.3.1.5 Jumbo Frame ..........................................................................................................................................105 4.3.1.6 Port Error Disabled Configuration............................................................................................................106 4.3.1.7 Port Error Disabled Status .......................................................................................................................108 4.3.1.8 Protected Ports........................................................................................................................................109
4
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.1.9 EEE ......................................................................................................................................................... 111 4.3.1.10 SFP Module Status ................................................................................................................................ 112 4.3.1.11 SFP Module Detail Status ...................................................................................................................... 113 4.3.2 Link Aggregation ................................................................................................................................................ 114 4.3.2.1 LAG Setting ............................................................................................................................................. 116 4.3.2.2 LAG Management ................................................................................................................................... 117 4.3.2.3 LAG Port Setting...................................................................................................................................... 118 4.3.2.4 LACP Setting ...........................................................................................................................................120 4.3.2.5 LACP Port Setting ...................................................................................................................................121 4.3.2.6 LAG Status ..............................................................................................................................................122 4.3.3 VLAN .................................................................................................................................................................124 4.3.3.1 VLAN Overview .......................................................................................................................................124 4.3.3.2 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN .................................................................................................................................125 4.3.3.3 Management VLAN .................................................................................................................................129 4.3.3.4 Create VLAN ...........................................................................................................................................130 4.3.3.5 Interface Settings.....................................................................................................................................131 4.3.3.6 Port to VLAN ...........................................................................................................................................135 4.3.3.7 Port VLAN Membership...........................................................................................................................136 4.3.3.8 Protocol VLAN Group Setting..................................................................................................................137 4.3.3.9 Protocol VLAN Port Setting .....................................................................................................................139 4.3.3.10 GVRP Setting ........................................................................................................................................140 4.3.3.11 GVRP Port Setting .................................................................................................................................142 4.3.3.12 GVRP VLAN ..........................................................................................................................................143 4.3.3.13 GVRP Statistics .....................................................................................................................................144 4.3.3.14 VLAN setting example: ..........................................................................................................................146
4.3.3.14.1 Two separate 802.1Q VLANs .........................................................................146 4.3.3.14.2 VLAN Trunking between two 802.1Q aware switches ..................................149
4.3.4 Spanning Tree Protocol .....................................................................................................................................152 4.3.4.1 Theory .....................................................................................................................................................152 4.3.4.2 STP Global Settings ................................................................................................................................159 4.3.4.3 STP Port Setting......................................................................................................................................161 4.3.4.4 CIST Instance Setting..............................................................................................................................164 4.3.4.5 CIST Port Setting.....................................................................................................................................166 4.3.4.6 MST Instance Configuration ....................................................................................................................168 4.3.4.7 MST Port Setting .....................................................................................................................................170 4.3.4.8 STP Statistics ..........................................................................................................................................172
4.3.5 Multicast ............................................................................................................................................................173 4.3.5.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................................173 4.3.5.2 Multicast Throttling Setting ......................................................................................................................174 4.3.5.3 Multicast Profile Setting ...........................................................................................................................176
5
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.6 IGMP Snooping .................................................................................................................................................178 4.3.6.1 IGMP Setting ...........................................................................................................................................182 4.3.6.2 IGMP Querier Setting ..............................................................................................................................184 4.3.6.3 IGMP Static Group...................................................................................................................................185 4.3.6.4 IGMP Group Table...................................................................................................................................186 4.3.6.5 IGMP Router Setting ...............................................................................................................................187 4.3.6.6 IGMP Router Table ..................................................................................................................................188 4.3.6.7 IGMP Forward All ....................................................................................................................................189 4.3.6.8 IGMP Snooping Statics............................................................................................................................190 4.3.6.9 IGMP Filter Setting ..................................................................................................................................191
4.3.7 MLD Snooping...................................................................................................................................................192 4.3.7.1 MLD Setting.............................................................................................................................................192 4.3.7.2 MLD Static Group ....................................................................................................................................194 4.3.7.3 MLD Group Table ....................................................................................................................................195 4.3.7.4 MLD Router Setting .................................................................................................................................196 4.3.7.5 MLD Router Table....................................................................................................................................197 4.3.7.6 MLD Forward All ......................................................................................................................................198 4.3.7.7 MLD Snooping Statics .............................................................................................................................199 4.3.7.8 MLD Filter Setting....................................................................................................................................200
4.3.8 LLDP..................................................................................................................................................................201 4.3.8.1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol .................................................................................................................201 4.3.8.2 LLDP Global Setting ................................................................................................................................201 4.3.8.3 LLDP Port Setting....................................................................................................................................203 4.3.8.4 LLDP Local Device ..................................................................................................................................206 4.3.8.5 LLDP Remove Device .............................................................................................................................208 4.3.8.6 MED Network Policy................................................................................................................................209 4.3.8.7 MED Port Setting.....................................................................................................................................213 4.3.8.8 LLDP Statistics ........................................................................................................................................216
4.3.9 MAC Address Table ...........................................................................................................................................218 4.3.9.1 Dynamic Learned ....................................................................................................................................218 4.3.9.2 Dynamic Address Setting ........................................................................................................................219 4.3.9.3 Static MAC Setting...................................................................................................................................220 4.3.9.4 MAC Filtering...........................................................................................................................................221
4.4 Quality of Service .....................................................................................................................................222 4.4.1 Understanding QoS ...........................................................................................................................................222 4.4.2 General..............................................................................................................................................................223 4.4.2.1 QoS Properties ........................................................................................................................................223 4.4.2.2 QoS Port Settings....................................................................................................................................224 4.4.2.3 Queue Settings........................................................................................................................................225 4.4.2.4 CoS Mapping...........................................................................................................................................226
6
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.2.5 DSCP Mapping........................................................................................................................................228 4.4.2.6 IP Precedence Mapping ..........................................................................................................................230 4.4.3 QoS Basic Mode................................................................................................................................................231 4.4.3.1 Global Settings ........................................................................................................................................231 4.4.3.2 Port Settings............................................................................................................................................232 4.4.4 Bandwidth Control .............................................................................................................................................233 4.4.4.1 Ingress Bandwidth Control ......................................................................................................................233 4.4.4.2 Egress Bandwidth Control .......................................................................................................................234 4.4.4.3 Egress Queue .........................................................................................................................................235 4.4.5 Storm Control.....................................................................................................................................................236 4.4.5.1 Global Setting ..........................................................................................................................................236 4.4.5.2 Port Setting..............................................................................................................................................237 4.4.6 Voice VLAN .......................................................................................................................................................239 4.4.6.1 Introduction to Voice VLAN......................................................................................................................239 4.4.6.2 Properties ................................................................................................................................................240 4.4.6.3 Telephony OUI MAC Setting....................................................................................................................242 4.4.6.4 Telephony OUI Port Setting .....................................................................................................................243
4.5 Security .....................................................................................................................................................245 4.5.1 Access Security .................................................................................................................................................245 4.5.1.1 Telnet.......................................................................................................................................................245 4.5.1.2 SSH .........................................................................................................................................................247 4.5.1.3 HTTP .......................................................................................................................................................249 4.5.1.4 HTTPs .....................................................................................................................................................250 4.5.1.5 Access Method Profile Rules ...................................................................................................................251 4.5.1.6 Access Profiles ........................................................................................................................................252 4.5.2 AAA ...................................................................................................................................................................253 4.5.2.1 Login List .................................................................................................................................................254 4.5.2.2 Enable List...............................................................................................................................................255 4.5.2.3 RADIUS Server .......................................................................................................................................256 4.5.2.4 TACACS+ Server.....................................................................................................................................259 4.5.3 802.1X ...............................................................................................................................................................261 4.5.3.1 Understanding IEEE 802.1X Port-based Authentication..........................................................................261 4.5.3.2 802.1X Setting .........................................................................................................................................265 4.5.3.3 802.1X Port Setting .................................................................................................................................266 4.5.3.4 Guest VLAN Setting ................................................................................................................................268 4.5.3.5 Authenticated Host ..................................................................................................................................270 4.5.4 Port Security ......................................................................................................................................................271 4.5.5 DHCP Snooping ................................................................................................................................................273 4.5.5.1 DHCP Snooping Overview ......................................................................................................................273 4.5.5.2 Global Setting ..........................................................................................................................................275
7
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.5.3 VLAN Setting...........................................................................................................................................276 4.5.5.4 Port Setting..............................................................................................................................................277 4.5.5.5 Statistics ..................................................................................................................................................279 4.5.5.6 Database Agent .......................................................................................................................................280 4.5.5.7 Rate Limit ................................................................................................................................................282 4.5.5.8 Option82 Global Setting ..........................................................................................................................283 4.5.5.9 Option82 Port Setting ..............................................................................................................................284 4.5.5.10 Option82 Circuit-ID Setting....................................................................................................................286 4.5.6 Dynamic ARP Inspection ...................................................................................................................................287 4.5.6.1 Global Setting ..........................................................................................................................................287 4.5.6.2 VLAN Setting...........................................................................................................................................288 4.5.6.3 Port Setting..............................................................................................................................................289 4.5.6.4 Statistics ..................................................................................................................................................291 4.5.6.5 ARP Rate Limit ........................................................................................................................................292 4.5.7 IP Source Guard ................................................................................................................................................293 4.5.7.1 Port Settings............................................................................................................................................294 4.5.7.2 Binding Table ...........................................................................................................................................296 4.5.8 DoS ...................................................................................................................................................................297 4.5.8.1 Global DoS Setting ..................................................................................................................................297 4.5.8.2 DoS Port Setting......................................................................................................................................300 4.5.9 Access Control List ............................................................................................................................................301 4.5.9.1 MAC-Based ACL .....................................................................................................................................302 4.5.9.2 MAC-Based ACE .....................................................................................................................................303 4.5.9.3 IPv4-Based ACL ......................................................................................................................................306 4.5.9.4 IPv4-Based ACE......................................................................................................................................307 4.5.9.5 IPv6-Based ACL ......................................................................................................................................312 4.5.9.6 IPv6-based ACE ......................................................................................................................................313 4.5.9.7 ACL Binding.............................................................................................................................................318
4.6 Ring............................................................................................................................................................319 4.6.1 Ring Wizard......................................................................................................................................................320 4.6.2 ERPS.................................................................................................................................................................321
4.7 Power over Ethernet ................................................................................................................................324 4.7.1 Power over Ethernet Powered Device ...............................................................................................................325 4.7.2 Power over Ethernet Configuration....................................................................................................................326 4.7.3 PoE Status.........................................................................................................................................................330 4.7.4 PoE Schedule....................................................................................................................................................331 4.7.5 Alive Check Configuration..................................................................................................................................334
4.8 Maintenance..............................................................................................................................................337 4.8.1 Switch Maintenance ..........................................................................................................................................337
8
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.8.1.1 Save Configuration ..................................................................................................................................337 4.8.1.2 Factory Default ........................................................................................................................................338 4.8.1.3 Reboot Switch .........................................................................................................................................338 4.8.1.4 Backup Manager .....................................................................................................................................339 4.8.1.5 Upgrade Manager....................................................................................................................................340 4.8.1.6 Dual Image ..............................................................................................................................................341 4.8.2 Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................................342 4.8.2.1 Cable Diagnostics....................................................................................................................................342 4.8.2.2 Ping Test..................................................................................................................................................344 4.8.2.3 IPv6 Ping Test..........................................................................................................................................345
5. COMMAND LINE INTERFACE.......................................................................................... 346
5.1 Accessing the CLI ....................................................................................................................................346
5.2 Telnet Login ..............................................................................................................................................348
6. Command Line Mode ....................................................................................................... 349
6.1 User Mode Commands ............................................................................................................................350 6.1.1 enable command ...............................................................................................................................................350 6.1.2 exit command ....................................................................................................................................................351 6.1.3 ping command ...................................................................................................................................................351 6.1.4 Show Command ................................................................................................................................................351 6.1.5 terminal command .............................................................................................................................................353
6.2 Privileged Mode Commands ...................................................................................................................353 6.2.1 clear command ..................................................................................................................................................353 6.2.2 clock command..................................................................................................................................................358 6.2.3 configure command ...........................................................................................................................................358 6.2.4 copy command ..................................................................................................................................................358 6.2.5 debug command................................................................................................................................................359 6.2.6 delete command ................................................................................................................................................359 6.2.7 disable command ..............................................................................................................................................359 6.2.8 end command....................................................................................................................................................360 6.2.9 exit command ....................................................................................................................................................360 6.2.10 ping command .................................................................................................................................................360 6.2.11 reboot command ..............................................................................................................................................361 6.2.12 renew command ..............................................................................................................................................361 6.2.13 restore-defaults command ...............................................................................................................................361 6.2.14 save command ................................................................................................................................................361 6.2.15 show command ...............................................................................................................................................362 6.2.16 ssl command ...................................................................................................................................................362
9
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.2.17 terminal command ...........................................................................................................................................363
6.3 Global Config Mode Commands.............................................................................................................364 6.3.1 aaa Command ...................................................................................................................................................364 6.3.2 boot Command ..................................................................................................................................................364 6.3.3 clock Command.................................................................................................................................................364 6.3.4 dos Command ...................................................................................................................................................364 6.3.5 dot1x Command ................................................................................................................................................365 6.3.6 do Command .....................................................................................................................................................365 6.3.7 enable Command ..............................................................................................................................................365 6.3.8 end Command ...................................................................................................................................................366 6.3.9 errdisable Command .........................................................................................................................................366 6.3.10 exit Command .................................................................................................................................................366 6.3.11 fpga Command ................................................................................................................................................366 6.3.12 gvrp Command ................................................................................................................................................366 6.3.13 hostname Command .......................................................................................................................................367 6.3.14 interface Command .........................................................................................................................................367 6.3.15 ip Command ....................................................................................................................................................367 6.3.16 ipv6 Command ................................................................................................................................................368 6.3.17 jumbo-frame Command ...................................................................................................................................368 6.3.18 lacp Command ................................................................................................................................................368 6.3.19 lag Command ..................................................................................................................................................368 6.3.20 line Command .................................................................................................................................................368 6.3.21 lldp Command .................................................................................................................................................369 6.3.22 logging Command ...........................................................................................................................................369 6.3.23 mac Command ................................................................................................................................................369 6.3.24 management-vlan Command ..........................................................................................................................369 6.3.25 mirror Command..............................................................................................................................................370 6.3.26 no Command ...................................................................................................................................................370 6.3.27 poe Command .................................................................................................................................................370 6.3.28 port-security Command ...................................................................................................................................371 6.3.29 qos Command .................................................................................................................................................371 6.3.30 radius Command .............................................................................................................................................371 6.3.31 rmon Command...............................................................................................................................................371 6.3.32 Snmp Command..............................................................................................................................................372 6.3.33 sntp Command ................................................................................................................................................372 6.3.34 spanning-tree Command .................................................................................................................................372 6.3.35 storm-control Command ..................................................................................................................................373 6.3.36 system Command............................................................................................................................................373 6.3.37 tacacs Command.............................................................................................................................................373 6.3.38 username Command .......................................................................................................................................373
10
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C 6.3.39 vlan Command ................................................................................................................................................374 6.3.40 voice-vlan Command .......................................................................................................................................374
7. SWITCH OPERATION ....................................................................................................... 375
7.1 Address Table ...........................................................................................................................................375 7.2 Learning ....................................................................................................................................................375 7.3 Forwarding & Filtering .............................................................................................................................375 7.4 Store-and-Forward ...................................................................................................................................375 7.5 Auto-Negotiation ......................................................................................................................................376
8. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................................... 377 APPENDIX A Switch's RJ45 Pin Assignments ................................................................... 379
A.1 1000Mbps, 1000BASE-T ..........................................................................................................................379 A.2 10/100Mbps, 10/100BASE-TX..................................................................................................................379
1. INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing PLANET GS-4210 Managed Switch series, which comes with multiple Gigabit Ethernet copper and 11
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
SFP fiber optic connectibility and robust Layer 2 and Layer 4 features, includes the following:
GS-4210-8UP2S GS-4210-16UP4C GS-4210-24UP4C
8-Port 10/100/1000T 802.3bt PoE + 2-Port 100/1000X SFP Managed Ethernet Switch 16-Port 10/100/1000T 802.3bt PoE++ plus 4-Port Gigabit TP/SFP Combo Managed Switch 24-Port 10/100/1000T 802.3bt PoE++ plus 4-Port Gigabit TP/SFP Combo Managed Switch
"Managed Switch" is used as an alternative name in this user's manual.
1.1 Packet Contents
Open the box of the Managed Switch and carefully unpack it. The box should contain the following items:
Model Name
GS-4210-8UP2S
GS-4210-16UP4C
GS-4210-24UP4C
Packaged Item
The Managed Switch
QR Code Sheet
CloudViewerPro Quick
Guide
RS-232 to RJ45 Console
Cable
Rubber Feet
Two Rack-mounting
Brackets with Attachment
Screws
Power Cord
SFP Dust Caps
2
4
4
If any item is found missing or damaged, please contact your local reseller for replacement.
1.2 Product Description
Perfect Managed PoE++ Switches with Advanced L2/L4 Switching and Security
PLANET GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C are cost-optimized, Gigabit 802.3bt PoE++ Managed Switches featuring PLANET intelligent PoE functions to improve the availability of critical business applications. They provide
12
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C IPv6/IPv4 dual stack management and built-in L2/L4 Gigabit switching engine along with 8/16/24 10/100/1000BASE-T ports featuring 95-watt 802.3bt type-4 PoE++ injector ports and 2 100/1000X SFP interfaces or 4 additional Gigabit TP/SFP combo ports. With a total power budget of up to 180W, 400W and 720 watts for different kinds of PoE applications, the GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C provide a quick, safe and cost-effective 802.3bt PoE++ network solution for small businesses and enterprises.
GS-4210-16UP4Cv2_Front-Panel-Introducton.png
13
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Cybersecurity Network Solution to Minimize Security Risks
The cybersecurity feature included to protect the switch management in a mission-critical network virtually needs no effort and cost to install. Both SSHv2 and TLSv1.2 protocols are utilized to provide strong protection against advanced threats. The network administrator can now construct highly-secure corporate networks with considerably less time and effort than before.
Redundant Ring, Fast Recovery for Critical Network Applications
The GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C support redundant ring technology and feature strong, rapid self-recovery capability to prevent interruptions and external intrusions. They incorporate advanced ITU-T G.8032 ERPS (Ethernet Ring Protection Switching) technology, Spanning Tree Protocol (802.1s MSTP) into customer's network to enhance system reliability and uptime in various environments.
14
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
802.3bt PoE++ 95-watt Power over 4-pair UTP Solution
As the GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C adopt the IEEE 802.bt PoE++ standard technology, they are capable to source up to 95 watts of power by using all the four pairs of standard Cat5e/6 Ethernet cabling to deliver power and full-speed data to each remote PoE compliant powered device (PD). Their power capability is three times more than that of the conventional 802.3at PoE+ and they are an ideal solution for those high power consuming network PDs, such as:
PoE PTZ speed dome cameras Network devices Thin clients AIO (all-in-one) touch PCs, point of sale (POS) and information kiosks Remote digital signage displays PoE lightings
15
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
802.3bt PoE++ and Advanced PoE Power Output Mode Management (GS-4210-16UP4C/24UP4C only)
To meet the demand of various powered devices consuming stable PoE power, the GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C support multi-PoE operation modes that include 95-watt 802.3bt type-4 PoE++ mode, 4-pair legacy and force mode to solve the incompatibility of non-standard 4-pair PoE PDs in the field.
95W 802.3bt PoE++ Power Output Mode 36W End-span 802.3at PoE+ Power Output Mode 36W Mid-span 802.3at PoE+ Power Output Mode
PoE Watts 95W 36W 36W
PoE Operation Mode 802.3bt PoE++
End-span 802.3at PoE Mid-span 802.3at PoE
Power Output Mode (Pins 1, 2, 3, 6 + Pins 4, 5, 7, 8)
(Pins 1, 2, 3, 6) (Pins 4, 5, 7, 8)
Built-in Unique PoE Functions for Powered Devices Management
As the GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C are the managed PoE++ switches for surveillance, wireless and VoIP networks, they feature the following special PoE management functions:
PD Alive Check Scheduled Power Recycling PoE Schedule PoE Usage Monitoring PoE Extension
Intelligent Powered Device Alive Check
The GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C can be configured to monitor connected PD status in real time via ping action. Once the PD stops working and responding, the GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C will resume the PoE port power and bring the PD back to work. They will greatly enhance the network reliability through the PoE port resetting the PD's power source and reducing administrator management burden.
16
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Scheduled Power Recycling
The GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C allow each of the connected PoE IP cameras or PoE wireless access points to reboot at a specified time each week. Therefore, it will reduce the chance of IP camera or AP crash resulting from buffer overflow.
PoE Schedule for Energy Savings
Under the trend of energy saving worldwide and contributing to environmental protection, the GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C can effectively control the power supply besides its capability of giving high watts power. The "PoE schedule" function helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMBs or Enterprises save power and money. It also increases security by powering off PDs that should not be in use during non-business hours.
PoE Usage Monitoring
Via the power usage chart in the web management interface, the GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C enable the administrator to monitor the status of the power usage of the connected PDs in real time. Thus, they greatly enhance the management efficiency of the facilities.
802.3at PoE+ Power and Ethernet Data Transmission Distance Extension
In the "Extend" operation mode, the GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C operate on a per-port basis at 10Mbps duplex operation but can support 50-watt PoE power output over a distance of up to 250 meters overcoming the 100m limit on Ethernet UTP cable. With this brand-new feature, the GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C provide an additional solution for 802.3at/af PoE distance extension, thus saving the cost of Ethernet cable installation.
17
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Environment-friendly, Smart Fan Design for Silent Operation (GS-4210-16UP4C/24UP4C only)
The GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C feature a desktop-sized metal housing, a low noise design and an effective ventilation system. They support the smart fan technology that automatically controls the speed of the built-in fan to reduce noise and maintain the temperature of the PoE switch for optimal power output capability. The GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C are able to operate reliably, stably and quietly in any environment without affecting its performance.
IPv6/IPv4 Dual Stack Management
Supporting both IPv6 and IPv4 protocols, the GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C help the SMBs to step in the IPv6 era with the lowest investment as their network facilities need not be replaced or overhauled if the IPv6 FTTx edge network is set up.
Robust Layer 2 Features
The GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C can be programmed for advanced switch management functions such as dynamic port link aggregation, 802.1Q VLAN and Q-in-Q VLAN, Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), loop and BPDU guard, IGMP snooping, and MLD snooping. Via the link aggregation, the GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C allow the operation of a high-speed trunk to combine with multiple ports, and supports fail-over as well. Also, the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is the Layer 2 protocol included to help discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain.
18
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Efficient Traffic Control
The GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C are loaded with robust QoS features and powerful traffic management to enhance services to business-class data, voice and video solutions. The functionality includes broadcast/multicast storm control, per port bandwidth control, IP DSCP QoS priority and remarking. It guarantees the best performance for VoIP and video stream transmission, and empowers the enterprises to take full advantage of the limited network resources.
Powerful Security
The GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C offer comprehensive Layer 2 to Layer 4 Access Control List (ACL) for enforcing security to the edge. It can be used to restrict network access by denying packets based on source and destination IP address, TCP/UDP ports or defined typical network applications. Its protection mechanism also comprises 802.1x Port-based user authentication. With the private VLAN function, communication between edge ports can be prevented to ensure user privacy.
Advanced IP Network Protection
The GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C also provide DHCP Snooping, IP Source Guard and Dynamic ARP Inspection functions to prevent IP snooping from attack and discard ARP packets with invalid MAC address. The network administrator can now build highly-secure corporate networks with considerably less time and effort than before.
Efficient Management
For efficient management, the GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C are equipped with Command line, Web and SNMP management interfaces. With the built-in Web-based management interface, the GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C offer
an easy-to-use, platform-independent management and configuration facility. For text-based management, it can be accessed via Telnet and the console port. By supporting the standard SNMP protocol, the switches can be managed via any SNMP-based management software.
19
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Remote Management Solution
PLANET's Universal Network Management System (UNI-NMS) and CloudViewer/CloudViewerPro app support IT staff by remotely managing all network devices and monitoring PDs' operational statuses. Thus, they're designed for both the enterprises and industries where deployments of PDs can be as remote as possible, without having to go to the actual location once a bug or faulty condition is found. With the UNI-NMS or CloudViewer/CloudViewerPro app, all kinds of businesses can now be speedily and efficiently managed from one platform.
Flexibility and Long-distance Extension Solution
The GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C provide 4 extra Gigabit TP interfaces supporting 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 copper to connect with surveillance network devices such as NVR, Video Streaming Server or NAS to facilitate surveillance management. Or through these dual-speed fiber SFP slots, they feature 100BASE-FX and 1000BASE-SX/LX SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) fiber transceivers to uplink to backbone switch and monitoring center in long distance. The distance can be extended from 550 meters to 2 kilometers (multi-mode fiber) and to 10/20/40/60/80/120 kilometers (single-mode fiber or WDM fiber). They are well suited for applications within the enterprise data centers and distributions.
Intelligent SFP Diagnosis Mechanism
The GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C and GS-4210-24UP4C support SFP-DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitor) function that can easily monitor real-time parameters of the SFP for network administrator, such as optical output power, optical input power, temperature, laser bias current and transceiver supply voltage.
20
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
1.3 How to Use This Manual
This User Manual is structured as follows: Section 2, INSTALLATION The section explains the functions of the Switch and how to physically install the Managed Switch. Section 3, SWITCH MANAGEMENT The section contains the information about the software function of the Managed Switch. Section 4, WEB CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch via Web interface. Section 5, COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The section contains the information about the command line interface of the Managed Switch. Section 6, COMMAND LINE MODE The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch via command line interface. Section 7, SWITCH OPERATION The chapter explains how to do the switch operation of the Managed Switch. Section 8, TROUBLESHOOTING The chapter explains how to troubleshoot the Managed Switch. Appendix A The section contains cable information of the Managed Switch.
1.4 Product Features
GS-4210-8UP2S Physical Port 8-port 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 copper with PoE injector function 2 100/1000BASE-X SFP slots RJ45 console interface for switch basic management and setup
GS-4210-16UP4C Physical Port 20 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 copper ports with 16-Port IEEE 802.3af PoE/802.3at PoE+/802.3bt PoE++ injector 4 100/1000BASE-X SFP slots, shared with ports 17 to 20 compatible with 100BASE-FX SFP RJ45 console interface for switch basic management and setup
GS-4210-24UP4C Physical Port 28 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 copper ports with 24-Port IEEE 802.3af PoE/802.3at PoE+/802.3bt PoE++ injector 4 100/1000BASE-X SFP slots, shared with ports 25 to 28 compatible with 100BASE-FX SFP RJ45 console interface for switch basic management and setup
21
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Switching Hardware-based 10/100Mbps, half/full duplex and 1000Mbps full duplex mode, flow control and auto-negotiation, and
auto MDI/MDI-X Features Store-and-Forward mode with wire-speed filtering and forwarding rates IEEE 802.3x flow control for full duplex operation and back pressure for half duplex operation 10K jumbo frame Automatic address learning and address aging Supports CSMA/CD protocol
Power over Ethernet Complies with IEEE 802.3bt Power over Ethernet Plus Plus Backward compatible with IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet Plus Up to 8/16/24 ports of IEEE 802.3at/IEEE 802.3bt PoE devices powered 8/16/24 PoE ports with built-in 802.3bt type-4 PoE 95W injector function All PoE ports support 802.3at end-span/mid-span PoE 36W injector function (GS-4210-16UP4C/24UP4C only) Auto detects powered device (PD) Circuit protection prevents power interference between ports Remote power feeding up to 100 meters in standard mode and 250m in extend mode PoE management
PoE admin-mode control PoE Consumption and allocation mode option Temperature threshold control PoE Budget 720W/660W/600W(Factory default) mode option (GS-4210-24UP4C only) Per port PoE function enable/disable PoE PD Type for Standard/Legacy/UPOE mode option (GS-4210-8UP2S only) Per port PoE Inline mode option (802.3BT (Factory default)/End-span/Mid-span) (GS-4210-16UP4C/24UP4C
only) Per port PD type option (Standard(Factory default)/Legacy/Force) (GS-4210-16UP4C/24UP4C only) PoE port power feeding priority PD classification detection Intelligent PoE features PoE extension PoE schedule PD alive check
22
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Layer 2 Features Prevents packet loss with back pressure (half-duplex) and IEEE 802.3x pause frame flow control (full-duplex) High performance Store and Forward architecture, broadcast storm control, and runt/CRC filtering that eliminates
erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth Supports VLAN
- IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN - Provider Bridging (VLAN Q-in-Q) support (IEEE 802.1ad) - Protocol VLAN - Voice VLAN - Private VLAN - Management VLAN - GVRP Supports Spanning Tree Protocol - STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) - RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) - MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol) - STP BPDU Guard, BPDU filtering and BPDU forwarding Supports Link Aggregation IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) Cisco ether-channel (static trunk) Provides port mirror (many-to-1) Loop protection to avoid broadcast loops Supports ERPS (Ethernet Ring Protection Switching)
Quality of Service Ingress and egress rate limit per port bandwidth control Storm control support
Broadcast/Unknown unicast/Unknown multicast Traffic classification
- IEEE 802.1p CoS - TOS/DSCP/IP precedence of IPv4/IPv6 packets Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin (WRR) CoS policies
Multicast Supports IPv4 IGMP snooping v2 and v3 Supports IPv6 MLD snooping v1, v2 IGMP querier mode support IGMP snooping port filtering MLD snooping port filtering
23
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Security
Authentication IEEE 802.1X port-based network access authentication Built-in RADIUS client to cooperate with the RADIUS servers RADIUS/TACACS+ login user access authentication
Access control list IPv4/IPv6 IP-based ACL MAC-based ACL
MAC security Static MAC MAC filtering
Port security for source MAC address entries filtering DHCP snooping to filter distrusted DHCP messages Dynamic ARP Inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding IP source guard prevents IP spoofing attacks DoS attack prevention IP address access management to prevent unauthorized intruder
Management
IPv4 and IPv6 dual stack management Switch management interface
- Web switch management - Console and telnet command line interface - SNMP v1 and v2c switch management - SSHv2, TLSv1.2 and SNMP v3 secure access SNMP Management - Four RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms and events) - SNMP trap for interface link up and link down notification User privilege levels control Built-in Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) client BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment System maintenance - Firmware upload/download via HTTP/TFTP - Configuration upload/download through web interface - Dual images - Hardware reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default SNTP Network Time Protocol Network Diagnostic - SFP-DDM (digital diagnostic monitor) - Cable diagnostics - ICMPv4/ICMPv6 remote ping Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) and LLDP-MED Event message logging to remote syslog server Smart fan with speed control PLANET Smart Discovery Utility for deployment management PLANET NMS system and CloudViewer/CloudViewerPro for deployment management
24
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
1.5 Product Specifications
Product Hardware Specifications Copper Ports SFP Slots PoE Injector Port Reset Button Power Requirements Dimensions (W x D x H) ESD Protection Enclosure Weight Power Consumption/Dissipation
LED
Switch Specifications Switch Architecture Switch Fabric Switch Throughput@64Bytes Address Table Shared Data Buffer Flow Control Jumbo Frame Power over Ethernet PoE Standard PoE Power Supply Type PoE Power Output Power Pin Assignment
GS-4210-8UP2S
8 x 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45 auto-MDI/MDI-X port 2 x 100/1000BASE-X SFP interface Supports 100/1000Mbps dual mode and DDM 8 ports with 802.3bt PoE++ injector function (Ports 1 to 8) < 5 sec: System reboot > 5 sec: Factory default 100~240V AC, 50/60Hz, auto-sensing 280 x 180 x 44 mm, 1U height Contact Discharge 6KV DC Air Discharge 8KV DC Metal 1800g 203 watts (max.)/692 BTU System: PWR x1(Green) SYS x1 (Green)
PoE Ports (Port 1 to Port 8): LNK/ACT x1 (Green) PoE-in-use x1 (Amber) Gigabit SFP Ports (Port 9 to Port 10): 100/1000 LNK/ACT x1 (Green)
Store-and-Forward 20Gbps/non-blocking 14.88Mpps 8K entries 4.1 megabits IEEE 802.3x pause frame for full duplex Back pressure for half duplex 10K bytes
IEEE 802.3bt PoE++ PSE IEEE 802.3af/at PoE+ PSE 802.3bt (Ports1 to 8) Per PoE port 54V DC, max. 95 watts 802.3bt: 1/2 (+), 3/6 (-),4/5 (-), 7/8 (+)
PoE Power Budget
180 watts
25
PoE Ability PD @ 12.5 watts PoE Ability PD @ 25 watts PoE Ability PD @ 51 watts PoE Ability PD @ 71 watts PoE Management Functions Active PoE Device Detection PoE Power Recycling PoE Schedule PD Alive Check PoE Extend Mode
PoE Port Management
Layer 2 Functions Port Mirroring
VLAN
Link Aggregation
Spanning Tree Protocol
IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping
QoS
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
8 units with standard mode 7 units with standard mode 3 units with standard mode 2 units with standard mode
Yes Yes, daily or predefined schedule 4 schedule profiles Yes Yes, max. up to 250 meters
Port Enable/Disable/Schedule PoE Power Inline Mode
- 802.3bt PoE PD Type
- Standard/Legacy/UPOE mode option
Port Priority
-Critical/High/Low mode option
PD Class/Current Used[mA]/Power Used[W]
-Real Time Display
TX/RX/both Many-to-1 monitor Up to 4 sessions 802.1Q tag-based VLAN Up to 256 VLAN groups, out of 4094 VLAN IDs 802.1ad Q-in-Q tunneling Voice VLAN Protocol VLAN Private VLAN (Protected port) GVRP IEEE 802.3ad LACP and static trunk Supports 5 groups of 8-port trunk IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) STP BPDU Guard, BPDU Filtering and BPDU Forwarding IGMP (v2/v3) snooping IGMP querier Up to 256 multicast groups
MLD (v1/v2) snooping, up to 256 multicast groups
8 mapping IDs to 8 level priority queues - Port number - 802.1p priority - 802.1Q VLAN tag
26
Ring Security Functions Access Control List Port Security MAC Security
Enhanced Security Management Functions Basic Management Interfaces Secure Management Interfaces System Management Event Management
SNMP MIBs
Standards Conformance Regulatory Compliance
Standards Compliance
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
- DSCP field in IP packet Traffic classification based, strict priority and WRR Supports ERPS, and complies with ITU-T G.8032 Recovery time < 450ms
IPv4/IPv6 IP-based ACL/MAC-based ACL Max. 256 ACL entries IEEE 802.1X Port-based authentication Built-in RADIUS client to co-operate with RADIUS server RADIUS/TACACS+ user access authentication IP-MAC port binding MAC filter Static MAC address, max. 256 static MAC entries DHCP Snooping and DHCP Option82 STP BPDU guard, BPDU filtering and BPDU forwarding DoS attack prevention ARP inspection IP source guard
Web browser; Telnet; SNMP v1, v2c
SSHv2, TLSv1.2, SNMP v3
Firmware upgrade by HTTP/TFTP protocol through Ethernet network LLDP protocol SNTP PLANET Smart Discovery Utility PLANET NMS System and CloudViewer/CloudViewerPro app Remote/Local Syslog System log RFC 1213 MIB-II RFC 1215 Generic Traps RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Bridge MIB Extensions RFC 2737 Entity MIB (v2) RFC 2819 RMON (1, 2, 3, 9) RFC 2863 Interface Group MIB RFC 3635 Ethernet-like MIB RFC 3621 Power Ethernet MIB
FCC Part 15 Class A, CE, LVD IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX/100BASE-FX IEEE 802.3z Gigabit SX/LX IEEE 802.3ab Gigabit 1000T IEEE 802.3x flow control and back pressure IEEE 802.3ad port trunk with LACP IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
27
Environment Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Humidity Standard Accessories
Packet Contents
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802.1p Class of Service IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagging IEEE 802.1x Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802.1ab LLDP IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet Plus IEEE 802.3bt Power over Ethernet Plus Plus IEEE 802.3az Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) RFC 768 UDP RFC 783 TFTP RFC 793 TCP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 2236 IGMP v2 RFC 3376 IGMP v3 RFC 2710 MLD v1 RFC 3810 MLD v2 ITU G.8032 ERPS Ring
0~50 degrees C
-10 ~ 70 degrees C
5 ~ 95% (non-condensing)
GS-4210-8UP2S x 1 QR Code Sheet x 1 CloudViewerPro App Quick Guide x1 RS232 to RJ45 Console Cable x 1 Rubber Feet x 4 Rack-mounting Package x 1 Power Cord x 1 SFP Dust Caps x 2
28
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Product
GS-4210-16UP4C
GS-4210-24UP4C
Hardware Specifications
RJ45 Copper Ports (MDI/MDIX)
20 x 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45
28 x 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45
PoE Injector Port SFP/mini-GBIC Port
16 ports with 802.3at/af/802.3bt PoE++
24 ports with 802.3at/af/802.3bt PoE++ injector
injector function (Ports 1 to 16)
function (Ports 1 to 24)
4 100/1000BASE-X SFP interfaces (Ports 17 to 20)
4 100/1000BASE-X SFP interfaces (Ports 25 to 28)
Supports 100/1000Mbps dual mode and DDM Supports 100/1000Mbps dual mode and DDM
Console
1 x RS-232-to-RJ45 serial port (115200, 8, N, 1)
Reset Button Fan
< 5 sec: System reboot > 5 sec: Factory default 3 x smart fan
Dimensions (W x D x H) 440 x 300 x 44.5 mm, 1U height
Weight
4.4kg
5kg
Enclosure
Metal
Power Requirements
100~240V AC, 50/60Hz, auto-sensing
Power Consumption/Dissipation
520 watts (max.)/1774BTU
900 watts (max.)/3070 BTU
LED
System: PWR x1 (Green) SYS x1 (Green) Per PoE Port (Ports 1 to 16/24): 10/100/1000 LNK/ACT x1 (10/100:Amber.1000:Green) IEEE 802.3af/at/bt PoE-in-use x1 (802.3af/at: Amber. 802.3bt: Green) Per Gigabit TP Port (Ports 17/25 to 20/28): 10/100 LNK/ACT x1 (Amber) 1000 LNK/ACT x1 (Green) Per Gigabit SFP Port (Ports 17/25 to 20/28): 100 LNK/ACT x1 (Amber) 1000 LNK/ACT x1 (Green) Alert: PoE PWR x1 (Red) Fan 1 x1 (Red) Fan 2 x1 (Red) Fan 3 x1 (Red)
Switch Specifications
Switch Architecture
Store-and-Forward
Switch Fabric
40Gbps/non-blocking
56Gbps/non-blocking
Switch Throughput@64Bytes
29.7Mpps
41.67Mpps
Address Table
8K entries
Shared Data Buffer
4.1 megabits
Flow Control
IEEE 802.3x pause frame for full duplex
29
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Jumbo Frame
Back pressure for half duplex 10K bytes
Power over Ethernet PoE Standard PoE Power Supply Type
PoE Power Output
Power Pin Assignment
IEEE 802.3bt PoE++ PSE
Backward compatible with IEEE 802.3at/af PoE PSE
802.3BT End-span Mid-span
Per port 54V DC 802.3bt mode, Ports 1 to 16/24: maximum 95 watts End-span mode: maximum 36 watts Mid-span mode: maximum 36 watts
802.3bt: 1/2(-), 3/6(+), 4/5(+), 7/8(-) End-span: 1/2(-), 3/6(+) Mid-span: 4/5(+), 7/8(-)
PoE Power Budget
Number of 95W 802.3bt Type-4 PDs Number of 60W 802.3bt Type-3 PDs Number of 802.3at PDs
400 watts (max)
4 6 16
720 watts, operating temperature < 40 degrees C 660 watts, operating temperature between 40 and 49 degrees C 600 watts, operating temperature around 50 degrees C (Factory default mode)
7
12
24
PoE Management Functions
Enhanced PoE Mode
Standard/Legacy/Force
Active PoE Device Detection PoE Power Recycling PoE Schedule PoE Extend Mode
PoE Port Management
Layer 2 Functions Port Mirroring
VLAN
Yes
Yes, daily or predefined schedule 4 schedule profiles Yes, max. up to 250 meters Port Enable/Disable/Schedule PoE mode control
802.3BT 802.3at End-span 802.3at Mid-span
Port Priority
TX/RX/both Many-to-1 monitor Up to 4 sessions 802.1Q tagged VLAN Up to 256 VLAN groups, out of 4094 VLAN IDs 802.1ad Q-in-Q tunneling Voice VLAN
30
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Protocol VLAN Private VLAN (Protected port) GVRP
Link Aggregation Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.3ad LACP and static trunk IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
STP BPDU Guard, BPDU Filtering and BPDU Forwarding
IGMP Snooping
IPv4 IGMP (v2/v3) snooping IGMP querier Up to 256 multicast groups
MLD Snooping
IPv6 MLD (v1/v2) snooping Up to 256 multicast groups
QoS
Ring Security Functions Access Control List Port Security MAC Security
Enhanced Security
8 mapping IDs to 8 level priority queues - Port number - 802.1p priority - DSCP/IP precedence of IPv4/IPv6 packets Traffic classification based, strict priority and WRR Ingress/Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control Supports ERPS, and complies with ITU-T G.8032 Recovery time < 450ms
IPv4/IPv6 IP-based ACL/MAC-based ACL IPv4/IPv6 IP-based ACE/MAC-based ACE Max. 256 ACL entries IEEE 802.1X Port-based authentication Built-in RADIUS client to co-operate with RADIUS server RADIUS/TACACS+ user access authentication IP-MAC port binding MAC filter Static MAC address, max. 256 static MAC entries DHCP Snooping and DHCP Option82 STP BPDU guard, BPDU filtering and BPDU forwarding DoS attack prevention ARP inspection IP source guard
Management Functions
Basic Management Interfaces
Secure Management Interfaces
RS232 to RJ45 Console Web browser Telnet SNMP v1, v2c
SSHv2, TLS v1.2, SNMP v3
System Management
Firmware upgrade by HTTP/TFTP protocol through Ethernet network LLDP protocol SNTP
31
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
PLANET Smart Discovery Utility PLANET NMS System and CloudViewer/CloudViewerPro app
Event Management
Remote/Local Syslog System log
SNMP MIBs
RFC 1213 MIB-II RFC 1215 Generic Traps RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Bridge MIB Extensions RFC 2737 Entity MIB (v2) RFC 2819 RMON (1, 2, 3, 9) RFC 2863 Interface Group MIB RFC 3635 Ethernet-like MIB RFC 3621 Power Ethernet MIB LLDP MIB
Standards Conformance
Regulatory Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A, CE
Standards Compliance
Environment Operating Storage
IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX/100BASE-FX IEEE 802.3z Gigabit SX/LX IEEE 802.3ab Gigabit 1000T IEEE 802.3x flow control and back pressure IEEE 802.3ad port trunk with LACP IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree protocol IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree protocol IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol IEEE 802.1p Class of Service IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagging IEEE 802.1x Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802.1ab LLDP IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet Plus IEEE 802.3bt Power over Ethernet Plus Plus IEEE 802.3az Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) RFC 768 UDP RFC 783 TFTP RFC 793 TCP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 1112 IGMP version 1 RFC 2236 IGMP version 2 RFC 3376 IGMP version 3 RFC 2710 MLD version 1 RFC 3810 MLD version 2 ITU G.8032 ERPS Ring
Temperature: 0 ~ 50 degrees C Relative Humidity: 5 ~ 95% (non-condensing) Temperature: -10 ~ 70 degrees C Relative Humidity: 5 ~ 95% (non-condensing)
32
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
2. INSTALLATION
This section describes the hardware features and installation of the Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount. For easier management and control of the Managed Switch, familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports. Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators. Before connecting any network device to the Managed Switch, please read this chapter completely.
2.1 Hardware Description
2.1.1 Switch Front Panel
The front panel provides a simple interface monitoring of the Managed Switch. Figure 2-1-1a, Figure 2-1-1b and Figure 2-1-1c show the front panels of the Managed Switches. GS-4210-8UP2S Front Panel
GS-4210-16UP4C Front Panel
Figure 2-1-1a GS-4210-8UP2S Front Panel
GS-4210-24UP4C Front Panel
Figure 2-1-1b GS-4210-16UP4C Front Panel
Figure 2-1-1c GS-4210-24UP4C Front Panel Gigabit TP Interface
10/100/1000BASE-T copper, RJ45 twisted-pair: Up to 100 meters. 100/1000BASE-X SFP Slots
Each of the SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) slot supports dual-speed, 1000BASE-SX/LX or 100BASE-FX - For 1000BASE-SX/LX SFP transceiver module: From 550 meters (multi-mode fiber) to 10/20/40/60/80/120 kilometers (single-mode fiber). - For 100BASE-FX SFP transceiver module: From 2 kilometers (multi-mode fiber) to 20/40/60 kilometers (single-mode fiber).
33
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Console Port The console port is an RJ45 port connector. It is an interface for connecting a terminal directly. Through the console port, it provides rich diagnostic information including IP address setting, factory reset, port management, link status and system setting.
Users can use the attached DB9 to RJ45 console cable in the package and connect to the console port on the device. After the connection, users can run any terminal emulation program (Hyper Terminal, ProComm Plus, Telix, Winterm and so on) to enter the startup screen of the device.
Reset Button On the left of the front panel, the reset button is designed to reboot the Managed Switch without turning off and on the power. The following is the summary table of reset button functions:
Reset Button Pressed and Released < 5 sec: System Reboot
> 5 sec: Factory Default
Function
Reboot the Managed Switch.
Reset the Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration.
The Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default
settings shown below:
Default username: admin
Default password: admin
Default IP address: 192.168.0.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: 192.168.0.254
34
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
2.1.2 LED Indications
The front panel LEDs indicate instant status of port links, data activity and system power; it helps monitor and troubleshoot when needed. Figure 2-1-2a, Figure 2-1-2b and Figure 2-1-2c show the LED indications of these Managed Switches.
GS-4210-8UP2S LED Indication
System
LED
PWR SYS
Color
Green Green
Lights to indicate the Switch has power.
Lights to indicate the system is working. Off to indicate the system is booting.
Function
PoE 10/100/1000BASE-T Interfaces (Ports 1 to 8)
LED
Color
Function
LNK/ACT PoE-in-Use
Green Amber
To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at Lights:
10/100/1000Mbps. Blinks: To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port. Lights: To indicate the port is providing DC in-line power.
Off: To indicate the connected device is not a PoE powered device (PD)
100/1000BASE-X SFP Interfaces (Ports 9 to 10)
LED
100/1000 LNK/ACT
Color
Function
Green
Lights: To indicate the link through that port is successfully established at 100/1000Mbps. Blinks: To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
Off: To indicate that the port is link down.
35
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C GS-4210-16UP4C LED Indication
LED Definition
System/Alert
LED PWR
Color Green
SYS
Green
FAN 3
Red
FAN 2
Red
FAN 1
Red
PoE PWR
Red
Function Lights to indicate that the Switch has power. Lights to indicate the system is working. Off to indicate the system is booting. Lights to indicate that FAN 3 is down. Lights to indicate that FAN 2 is down. Lights to indicate that FAN 1is down. Lights to indicate that the PoE power is down.
10/100/1000BASE-T Interfaces (Ports 1 to 16)
LED Ethernet
PoE
Color Green Amber Green Amber
Lights: Blinks: Lights: Blinks: Lights: Off: Lights: Off:
Function To indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps. To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port. To indicate that the port is operating at 10/100Mbps. To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port. To indicate the port is providing DC in-line power with 802.3bt PoE mode. To indicate the connected device is not a PoE powered device (PD) To indicate the port is providing DC in-line power with 802.3at/af PoE modes. To indicate the connected device is not a PoE powered device (PD)
10/100/1000BASE-T Interfaces (Ports 17 to 20)
LED 1000 LNK/ACT
10/100 LNK/ACT
Color Green
Amber
Lights: Blinks: Lights: Blinks:
Function To indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps. To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port. To indicate that the port is operating at 10/100Mbps. To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
100/1000BASE-SX/LX SFP Interfaces (Ports 17 to 20)
LED 1000 LNK/ACT
100 LNK/ACT
Color Green
Amber
Lights: Blinks: Lights: Blinks:
Function To indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps. To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port. To indicate that the port is operating at 100Mbps. To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
36
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C GS-4210-24UP4C LED Indication
LED Definition
System/Alert
LED PWR
Color Green
SYS
Green
FAN 3
Red
FAN 2
Red
FAN 1
Red
PoE PWR
Red
Function Lights to indicate that the Switch has power. Lights to indicate the system is working. Off to indicate the system is booting. Lights to indicate that FAN 3 is down. Lights to indicate that FAN 2 is down. Lights to indicate that FAN 1is down. Lights to indicate that the PoE power is down.
10/100/1000BASE-T Interfaces (Ports 1 to 24)
LED Ethernet
PoE
Color Green Amber Green Amber
Lights: Blinks: Lights: Blinks: Lights: Off: Lights: Off:
Function To indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps. To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port. To indicate that the port is operating at 10/100Mbps. To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port. To indicate the port is providing DC in-line power with 802.3bt PoE mode. To indicate the connected device is not a PoE powered device (PD) To indicate the port is providing DC in-line power with 802.3at/af PoE modes. To indicate the connected device is not a PoE powered device (PD)
10/100/1000BASE-T Interfaces (Ports 25 to 28)
LED 1000 LNK/ACT
10/100 LNK/ACT
Color Green
Amber
Lights: Blinks: Lights: Blinks:
Function To indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps. To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port. To indicate that the port is operating at 10/100Mbps. To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
100/1000BASE-SX/LX SFP Interfaces (Ports 25 to 28)
LED 1000 LNK/ACT
100 LNK/ACT
Color Green
Amber
Lights: Blinks: Lights: Blinks:
Function To indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps. To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port. To indicate that the port is operating at 100Mbps. To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.
37
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
2.1.3 Switch Rear Panel
The rear panels of the Managed Switches indicate an AC inlet power socket, which accepts input power from 100 to 240V AC, 50-60Hz. Figure 2-1-3a shows the rear panels of these Managed Switches GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C & GS-4210-24UP4C Rear Panels
Figure 2-1-3a Rear Panels of GS-4210-8UP2S, GS-4210-16UP4C & GS-4210-24UP4C AC Power Receptacle
For compatibility with electric service in most areas of the world, the Managed Switch's power supply automatically adjusts to line power in the range of 100-240V AC and 50/60 Hz. Plug the female end of the power cord firmly into the receptacle on the rear panel of the Managed Switch. Plug the other end of the power cord into an electrical outlet and the power will be ready.
The device is a power-required device, which means it will not work till it is powered. If your networks Power Notice: should be active all the time, please consider using UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply) for your device.
It will prevent you from network data loss or network downtime. In some areas, installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your Managed Switch Power Notice: from being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the Managed Switch.
38
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
2.2 Installing the Switch
This section describes how to install your Managed Switch and make connections to the Managed Switch. Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented. To install your Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf, simply complete the following steps.
2.2.1 Desktop Installation
To install the Managed Switch on desktop or shelf, please follow these steps: Step 1: Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the Managed Switch. Step 2: Place the Managed Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source, as shown in Figure 2-1-4.
Figure 2-1-4 Place the Managed Switch on the desktop Step 3: Keep enough ventilation space between the Managed Switch and the surrounding objects.
When choosing a location, please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter 1, Section 4, and specifications.
Step 4: Connect the Managed Switch to network devices. Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10/100/1000 RJ45 ports on the front of the Managed Switch. Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer server, workstation or router.
Connection to the Managed Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ45 tips. For more information, please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A. Step 5: Supply power to the Managed Switch. Connect one end of the power cable to the Managed Switch. Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet. When the Managed Switch receives power, the Power LED should remain solid Green.
39
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
2.2.2 Rack Mounting
To install the Managed Switch in a 19-inch standard rack, please follow the instructions described below. Step 1: Place the Managed Switch on a hard flat surface, with the front panel positioned towards the front side. Step 2: Attach the rack-mount bracket to each side of the Managed Switch with supplied screws attached to the package.
Figure 2-1-5 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the Managed Switch.
Figure 2-1-5 Attach Brackets to the Managed Switch. You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets. Damage caused to the parts by using incorrect screws would invalidate the warranty. Step 3: Secure the brackets tightly. Step 4: Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side. Step 5: After the brackets are attached to the Managed Switch, use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack, as shown in Figure 2-1-6.
Figure 2-1-6 Mounting Managed Switch in a Rack Step 6: Proceed with Steps 4 and 5 of session 2.2.1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and supply power to the
Managed Switch. 40
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
2.2.3 Installing the SFP transceiver
The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot. The SFP transceivers are hot-pluggable and hot-swappable. You can plug in and out the transceiver to/from any SFP port without having to power down the Managed Switch, as the Figure 2-1-7 shows.
Figure 2-1-7 Plug in the SFP transceiver Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers PLANET Managed Switch supports both single mode and multi-mode SFP transceivers. The following list of approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication:
Gigabit SFP Transceiver Modules
MGB-GT
SFP-Port 1000BASE-T Module
MGB-LX
SFP-Port 1000BASE-LX mini-GBIC module - 20km
MGB-SX
SFP-Port 1000BASE-SX mini-GBIC module - 550m
MGB-SX2
SFP-Port 1000BASE-SX mini-GBIC module - 2km
MGB-L40
SFP-Port 1000BASE-LX mini-GBIC module - 40km
MGB-L80
SFP-Port 1000BASE-LX mini-GBIC module - 80km
MGB-L120
SFP-Port 1000BASE-LX mini-GBIC module - 120km
MGB-LA10
SFP-Port 1000BASE-BX (WDM, TX:1310nm) mini-GBIC module - 10km
MGB-LB10
SFP-Port 1000BASE-BX (WDM, TX:1550nm) mini-GBIC module - 10km
MGB-LA20
SFP-Port 1000BASE-BX (WDM, TX:1310nm) mini-GBIC module - 20km
MGB-LB20
SFP-Port 1000BASE-BX (WDM, TX:1550nm) mini-GBIC module - 20km
MGB-LA40
SFP-Port 1000BASE-BX (WDM, TX:1310nm) mini-GBIC module - 40km
MGB-LB40
SFP-Port 1000BASE-BX (WDM, TX:1550nm) mini-GBIC module - 40km
MGB-LA80
SFP-Port 1000BASE-BX (WDM, TX:1490nm) mini-GBIC module - 80km
MGB-LB80
SFP-Port 1000BASE-BX (WDM, TX:1550nm) mini-GBIC module - 80km
41
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Fast Ethernet SFP Transceiver Modules
MFB-FX
SFP-Port 100BASE-FX Transceiver (1310nm) -2km
MFB-F20
SFP-Port 100BASE-FX Transceiver (1310nm) - 20km
MFB-FA20
SFP-Port 100BASE-BX Transceiver (WDM,TX:1310nm) -20km
MFB-FB20
SFP-Port 100BASE-BX Transceiver (WDM,TX:1550nm) -20km
MFB-F40
SFP-Port 100BASE-FX Transceiver (1310nm) 40km
MFB-F60
SFP-Port 100BASE-FX Transceiver (1310nm) 60km
It is recommended to use PLANET SFP on the Managed Switch. If you insert an SFP transceiver that is not supported, the Managed Switch will not recognize it.
In the installation steps below, this Manual uses Gigabit SFP transceiver as an example. However, the steps for Fast Ethernet SFP transceiver are similar.
1. Before we connect Managed Switch to the other network device, we have to make sure both sides of the SFP transceivers are with the same media type, for example: 1000BASE-SX to 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX to 1000BASE-LX.
2. Check whether the fiber-optic cable type matches with the SFP transceiver requirement. To connect to 1000BASE-SX SFP transceiver, please use the multi-mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type. To connect to 1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver, please use the single-mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type.
Connect the Fiber Cable 1. Insert the duplex LC connector into the SFP transceiver. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to a device with SFP transceiver installed. 3. Check the LNK/ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Managed Switch. Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating
correctly. 4. Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link fails. To function with some fiber-NICs or media converters, user has to set
the port Link mode to "1000 Force" or "100 Force". Remove the Transceiver Module 1. Make sure there is no network activity anymore. 2. Remove the fiber-optic cable gently. 3. Lift up the lever of the MGB module and turn it to a horizontal position. 4. Pull out the module gently through the lever.
42
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 2-1-8 How to Pull Out the SFP Transceiver Never pull out the module without lifting up the lever of the module and turning it into a horizontal position. Directly pulling out the module could damage the module and the SFP module slot of the Managed Switch.
43
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
3. SWITCH MANAGEMENT
This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Managed Switch. It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device (workstation or personal computer) and the system. It also contains information about port connection options. This chapter covers the following topics:
Requirements Management Access Overview Administration Console Access Web Management Access SNMP Access Standards, Protocols, and Related Reading
3.1 Requirements
Workstations running Windows XP/2003/2008/2012/Vista/7/8/10/11, MAC OS X or later, Linux, UNIX, or other platforms are compatible with TCP/IP protocols.
Workstation is installed with Ethernet NIC (Network Interface Card). Serial Port connect (Terminal)
The above PC comes with COM Port (DB9/RS-232) or USB-to-RS-232 converter. The above Workstations have been installed with terminal emulator, such as Tera Term, PuTTY or Hyper
Terminal included in Windows XP/2003. Serial cable -- one end is attached to the RS-232 serial port, while the other end to the console port of the
Managed Switch. Ethernet Port connection
Network cables -- Use standard network (UTP) cables with RJ45 connectors. The above Workstation is installed with Web browser.
It is recommended to use Chrome 98.0.xxx or above to access Managed Switch.
44
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
3.2 Management Access Overview
The Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods: An administration console Web browser interface An external SNMP-based network management application
The administration console and Web browser interfaces are embedded in the Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use. Each of these management methods has their own advantages. Table 3-1 compares the three management methods.
Method
Advantages
Disadvantages
Console
No IP address or subnet needed
Must be near the switch or use dial-up
Text-based
connection
Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal Not convenient for remote users
built into Windows 2000/XP, 2003,
Modem connection may prove to be unreliable
Vista/7/8/10, 2008 operating systems
or slow
Secure
Web Browser Ideal for configuring the switch remotely Security can be compromised (hackers need
Compatible with all popular browsers
only know the IP address and subnet mask)
Can be accessed from any location
May encounter lag times on poor connections
Most visually appealing
SNMP Agent Communicates with switch functions at Requires SNMP manager software
the MIB level
Least visually appealing of all three methods
Based on open standards
Some settings require calculations
Security can be compromised (hackers need
only know the community name)
Table 3-1 Comparison of Management Methods
45
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
3.3 Administration Console
The administration console is an internal, character-oriented, and command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings. Using this method, you can view the administration console from a terminal, personal computer, Apple Macintosh, or workstation connected to the Managed Switch's console port.
Figure 3-1-1 Console Management Direct Access Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal-emulation program (such as HyperTerminal) to the Managed Switch console (serial) port. When using this management method, a straight RS-232 to RJ45 cable is required to connect the switch to the PC. After making this connection, configure the terminal-emulation program to use the following parameters: The default parameters are:
115200 bps 8 data bits No parity 1 stop bit
Figure 3-1-2 Terminal Parameter Settings You can change these settings, if desired, after you log on. This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots. Also, certain error messages are sent to the serial port, regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated. A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal-emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port. A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP.
46
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
3.4 Web Management
The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer. After you set up your IP address for the switch, you can access the Managed Switch's Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Managed Switch.
Figure 3-1-3 Web Management You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location, just as if you were directly connected to the Managed Switch's console port. Web Management requires Google Chrome, Safari or Mozilla Firefox latest version.
Figure 3-1-4 Web Main Screen of Managed Switch The following web screen based on the GS-4210-24UP4C is the same as GS-4210-8UP2S and GS-4210-16UP4C.
47
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
3.5 SNMP-based Network Management
You can use an external SNMP-based application to configure and manage the Managed Switch, such as SNMPc Network Manager, HP Openview Network Node Management (NNM) or What's Up Gold. This management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string. This management method, in fact, uses two community strings: the get community string and the set community string. If the SNMP Network management Station only knows the set community string, it can read and write to the MIBs. However, if it only knows the get community string, it can only read MIBs. The default gets and sets community strings for the Managed Switch are public.
Figure 3-1-5 SNMP Management
3.6 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility
For easily listing the Managed Switch in your Ethernet environment, the Planet Smart Discovery Utility from user's manual CD-ROM is an ideal solution. The following installation instructions are to guide you to running the Planet Smart Discovery Utility.
1. Deposit the Planet Smart Discovery Utility in administrator PC. 2. Run this utility as the following screen appears.
Figure 3-1-6 Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen 48
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
If there are two LAN cards or above in the same administrator PC, choose a different LAN card by using the "Select Adapter" tool.
3.
Press "Refresh" button for the currently connected devices in the discovery list as the screen shows below:
Figure 3-1-7 Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen
1. This utility shows all necessary information from the devices, such as MAC address, device name, firmware version and device IP subnet address. It can also assign new password, IP subnet address and description to the devices.
2. After the setup is completed, press the "Update Device", "Update Multi" or "Update All" button to take effect. The definitions of the 3 buttons above are shown below:
Update Device: Use the current setting on one single device. Update Multi: Use the current setting on multi-devices. Update All: Use the current setting on whole devices in the list.
The same functions mentioned above also can be found in "Option" tools bar. 3. When clicking the "Control Packet Force Broadcast" function, it allows you to assign a new setting value to the Web
Smart Switch under a different IP subnet address. 4. Press the "Connect to Device" button and the Web login screen appears in Figure 3-1-4. 5. Press the "Exit" button to shut down the Planet Smart Discovery Utility.
49
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4. WEB CONFIGURATION
This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web-based management. About Web-based Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Google Chrome. The Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection, making sure the manager PC must be set on the same IP subnet address as the Managed Switch. For example, the default IP address of the Managed Switch is 192.168.0.100, then the manager PC should be set at 192.168.0.x (where x is a number between 1 and 254, except 100), and the default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. If you have changed the default IP address of the Managed Switch to 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 via console, then the manager PC should be set at 192.168.1.x (where x is a number between 2 and 254) to do the relative configuration on manager PC.
Figure 4-1 Web Management Logging on the switch 1. Use Google Chrome 98.0.xxx or above Web browser. Enter the factory-default IP address to access the Web interface.
The factory-default IP address is as follows: https://192.168.0.100
50
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
2. When the following login screen appears, please enter the default username "admin" with password "admin" (or the username/password you have changed via console) to login the main screen of Managed Switch. The login screen in Figure 4-1-2 appears.
Default User Name: admin Default Password: admin
Figure 4-2 Login screen
The following web screen based on the GS-4210-24UP4C is the same as GS-4210-8UP2S and GS-4210-16UP4C. After entering the username and password, the main screen appears as Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 Default Main Page 51
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Now, you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Managed Switch by Web interface. The Switch Menu on the left of the web page lets you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch provides.
It is recommended to use Google Chrome 98.0.xxx or above to access Managed Switch. The changed IP address takes effect immediately after clicking on the Save button. You need to
use the new IP address to access the Web interface.
For security reason, please change and memorize the new password after this first setup. Only accept command in lowercase letter under Web interface.
4.1 Main Web Page
The Managed Switch provides a Web-based browser interface for configuring and managing it. This interface allows you to
access the Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice. This chapter describes how to use the Managed Switch's
Web browser interface to configure and manage it.
Main Functions
Copper Port Link
Save Button SFP Port Link Status
Figure 4-1-1 Web Main Page Panel Display The Web agent displays an image of the Managed Switch's ports. The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports, including Link up or Link down. Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page. The port states are illustrated as follows:
State RJ45 Ports SFP Ports
Disabled
Down
Link
52
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C Main Menu Using the onboard Web agent, you can define system parameters, manage and control the Managed Switch, and all its ports, or monitor network conditions. Via the Web-Management, the administrator can set up the Managed Switch by selecting the functions those listed in the Main Function. The screen in Figure 4-1-2 appears. The Switch Menu on the top of the Web page lets you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch provides. The Switch Menu always contains one or more buttons, such as "System", "Switching", "QoS", "Security", "Ring", "PoE" and "Maintenance".
Figure 4-1-2 Managed Switch Main Functions Menu
53
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.1.1 Saving Configuration via the Web
To save all applied changes and set the current configuration as a startup configuration, the startup-configuration file will be loaded automatically across a system reboot. The screen in Figure 4-1-3 appears.
Figure 4-1-3 Save Configuration Screenshot 1. Click "Save > Save Configurations to FLASH" to login to the "Configuration Manager" page. 2. Press the "Apply" button to save running configuration to start up configuration.
Figure 4-1-4 Save Configuration Screenshot
54
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.1.2 Configuration Manager
The system file folder contains configuration settings. The screen in Figure 4-1-5 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-1-5 Save Button Screenshot
Object
Description
Running Configuration Refers to the running configuration sequence used in the switch.
In switch, the running configuration file stores in the RAM. In the current version, the running configuration sequence running-config can be saved from the RAM to FLASH by saving "Source File = Running Configuration" to "Destination File = Startup Configuration", so that the running configuration sequence becomes the startup configuration file, which is called configuration save.
To prevent illicit file upload and easier configuration, switch mandates the name of running configuration file to be running-config.
Startup Configuration Refers to the configuration sequence used in switch startup.
Startup configuration file stores in nonvolatile storage, corresponding to the so-called configuration save. If the device supports multi-config file, name the configuration file to be .cfg file, the default is startup.cfg.
If the device does not support multi-config file, mandates the name of startup configuration file to be startup-config.
Backup Configuration Buttons
The backup configuration is empty in FLASH; please save the backup configuration first by "Maintenance > Backup Manager".
: Click to save configuration.
55
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2 System
Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch. Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information. This section has the following items:
4.2.1 Management
System Information
The switch system information is provided here.
IP Configuration
Configure the switch-managed IP information on this page.
IPv6 Configuration
Configure the switch-managed IPv6 information on this page.
User Configuration
Configure new user name and password on this page.
4.2.2 Time Settings
System Time
Configure system time settings on this page.
SNTP Settings
Configure SNTP settings on this page.
4.2.3 Log Management
Logging Service
Configure logging service settings on this page.
Local Logging
Configure local logging settings on this page.
Remote Syslog
Configure remote syslog settings on this page.
Logging Message
Configure logging message settings on this page.
4.2.4 SNMP Management
SNMP Setting
Configure System Time settings on this page.
SNMP Community
Configure SNTP settings on this page.
SNMP View
Configure System Time settings on this page.
SNMP Access Group
Configure SNTP settings on this page.
SNMP User
Configure System Time settings on this page.
SNMPv1, 2 Notification Recipients Configure SNTP settings on this page.
SNMPv3 Notification Recipients
Configure System Time settings on this page.
SNMP Engine ID
Configure SNTP settings on this page.
SNMP Remote Engine ID
Configure System Time settings on this page.
4.2.5 RMON
RMON Statistics
Configure RMON statistics settings on this page.
RMON Event
Configure RMON event settings on this page.
RMON Event Log
Configure RMON event log settings on this page.
RMON Alarm
Configure RMON alarm settings on this page.
RMON History
Configure RMON history settings on this page.
RMON History Log
Configure RMON history log settings on this page.
4.2.6 Remote Management
Remote NMS Configuration
Configure Remote NMS Configuration settings on this page.
56
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.1 Management 4.2.1.1 System Information
The System Info page provides information for the current device information. System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address, software version and system uptime. The screens in Figure 4-2-1 appear.
Figure 4-2-1 System Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object System Name System Location System Contact MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Loader Version Loader Date Firmware Version Firmware Date System Object ID System Up Time PCB/HW Version Smart Fan
Description Display the current system name. Display the current system location. Display the current system contact. The MAC address of this Managed Switch. The IP address of this Managed Switch. The subnet mask of this Managed Switch. The gateway of this Managed Switch. The loader version of this Managed Switch. The loader date of this Managed Switch. The firmware version of this Managed Switch. The firmware date of this Managed Switch. The system object ID of the Managed Switch. The period of time the device has been operational. The hardware version of this Managed Switch. The smart fan status (Low Speed or High Speed) of this Managed Switch. (GS-4210-16UP4C/24UP4C only)
Buttons
: Click to edit parameter. 57
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.1.2 IP Configuration
The IP Configuration includes the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway. The configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration. Fill out the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device. The screens in Figure 4-2-2 & Figure 4-2-3 appear.
Figure 4-2-2 IP Address Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Mode
IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway DNS Server 1/2 Buttons
Description Indicates the IP address mode operation. Possible modes are: Static: Enable NTP mode operation.
When enabling NTP mode operation, the agent forwards and transfers NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain. DHCP: Enable DHCP client mode operation. Enable the DHCP client by checking this box. If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero, DHCP will retry. If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non-zero, DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used. The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup. Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation.
Provide the subnet mask of this switch in dotted decimal notation.
Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation.
Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation.
: Click to apply changes.
58
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-2-3 IP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object DHCP State IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway DNS Server 1/2
Description Display the current DHCP state. Display the current IP address. Display the current subnet mask. Display the current gateway. Display the current DNS server.
4.2.1.3 IPv6 Configuration
The IPv6 Configuration includes Auto Configuration, IPv6 Address and Gateway. The configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration. Fill out the Auto Configuration, IPv6 Address and Gateway for the device. The screens in Figure 4-2-4 & Figure 4-2-5 appear.
Figure 4-2-4 IPv6 Address Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Auto Configuration
Description Enable IPv6 auto-configuration by checking this box. If it fails, the configured IPv6 address is zero. The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds; the total time needed to complete auto-configuration can be significantly longer.
59
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
IPv6 Address
Gateway DHCPv6 Client Buttons
Provide the IPv6 address of this switch.
IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'.
The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It also uses the following legally IPv4 address. For example, ':192.1.2.34'.
Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch. The allowed range is 1 through 128. Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. To enable this Managed Switch to accept a configuration from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version 6 (DHCPv6) server. By default, the Managed Switch does not perform DHCPv6 client actions. DHCPv6 clients request the delegation of long-lived prefixes that they can push to individual local hosts.
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-5 IPv6 Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Auto Configuration IPv6 In Use Address IPv6 In Use Gateway IPv6 Static Address IPv6 Static Gateway DHCPv6 Client
Description Display the current auto configuration state. Display the current IPv6 in-use address. Display the current in-use gateway. Display the current IPv6 static address. Display the current IPv6 static gateway. Display the current DHCPv6 client status.
60
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.1.4 User Configuration
This page provides an overview of the current users and privilege type. Currently the only way to login as another user on the Web server is to close and reopen the browser. After the setup is completed, please press "Apply" button to take effect. Please login Web interface with a new user name and password; the screens in Figure 4-2-6 & Figure 4-2-7 appear.
Figure 4-2-6 Local User Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Username
Password Type Password Retype Password Privilege Type
Description
The name identifying the user. Maximum length: 32 characters; Maximum number of users: 8 The password type for the user.
Enter the user's new password here. (Range: 0-32 characters plain text, case sensitive) Please enter the user's new password here again to confirm.
The privilege type for the user. Options:
Admin User
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-2-7 Local User Page Screenshot
Object Username Password Type Privilege Type Modify
Description Display the current username. Display the current password type. Display the current privilege type. Click to modify the local user entry
: Delete the current user
61
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.2 Time Settings
4.2.2.1 System Time
Configure SNTP on this page. SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems. You can specify SNTP Servers and set GMT Time zone. The SNTP Configuration screens in Figure 4-2-8 & Figure 4-2-9 appear.
Figure 4-2-8 SNTP Setup Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Enable SNTP
Manual Time
Time Zone Daylight Saving Time
Description Enabled: Enable SNTP mode operation.
When enabling SNTP mode operation, the agent forwards and transfers SNTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain. Disabled: Disable SNTP mode operation. To set time manually. Year - Select the starting year. Month - Select the starting month. Day - Select the starting day. Hours - Select the starting hour. Minutes - Select the starting minute. Seconds - Select the starting seconds. Allows to select the time zone according to the current location of switch.
This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration. Select 'Disable' to disable the Daylight Saving Time configuration. Select 'Recurring' and configure the
62
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Daylight Saving Time Offset
Recurring From
Recurring To
Non-recurring From
Non-recurring To
Daylight Saving Time duration to repeat the configuration every year. Select 'Non-Recurring' and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration for single time configuration. (Default: Disabled). Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. ( Range: 1 to 1440 ) Week - Select the starting week number. Day - Select the starting day. Month - Select the starting month. Hours - Select the starting hour. Minutes - Select the starting minute. Week - Select the starting week number. Day - Select the starting day. Month - Select the starting month. Hours - Select the starting hour. Minutes - Select the starting minute. Week - Select the starting week number. Day - Select the starting day. Month - Select the starting month. Hours - Select the starting hour. Minutes - Select the starting minute. Week - Select the starting week number. Day - Select the starting day. Month - Select the starting month. Hours - Select the starting hour. Minutes - Select the starting minute.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
63
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-2-9 Time Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Current Data/Time SNTP Time Zone Daylight Saving Time Daylight Saving Time
Offset From To
Description Display the current data/time. Display the current SNTP state. Display the current time zone. Display the current daylight saving time state. Display the current daylight saving time offset state.
Display the current daylight saving time from. Display the current daylight saving time to.
64
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.2.2 SNTP Server Settings
The SNTP Server Configuration screens in Figure 4-2-10 & Figure 4-2-11 appear.
Figure 4-2-10 SNTP Setup Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object SNTP Server Address Server Port
Description Type the IP address or domain name of the SNTP server. Type the port number of the SNTP.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-11 SNTP Server Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object SNTP Server Address
Description Display the current SNTP server address.
Server Port
Display the current SNTP server port.
65
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.3 Log Management
The Managed Switch log management is provided here. The local logs allow you to configure and limit system messages that
are logged to flash or RAM memory. The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 6 to be logged to
RAM. The following table lists the event levels of the Managed Switch:
Level Severity Name
Description
7 Debug
Debugging messages
6 Informational Informational messages only
5 Notice
Normal but significant condition, such as cold start
4 Warning
Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)
3 Error
Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)
2 Critical
Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory error - resource exhausted)
1 Alert 0 Emergency
Immediate action needed System unusable
4.2.3.1 Logging Service
The switch system local log information is provided here. The local Log screens in Figure 4-2-12 & Figure 4-2-13 appear.
Figure 4-2-12 Logging Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Logging Service
Description Enabled: Enable logging service operation. Disabled: Disable logging service operation.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-13 Logging Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Logging Service
Description Display the current logging service status.
66
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.3.2 Local Logging
The switch system local logging information is provided here. The local Log screens in Figure 4-2-14 & Figure 4-2-15 appear.
Figure 4-2-14 Local Log Target Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Target
Severity
Description The target of the local log entry. The following target types are supported:
Buffered: Target the buffer of the local log. File: Target the file of the local log. The severity of the local log entry. The following severity types are supported: Emerg: Emergency level of the system unstable for local log. Alert: Alert level of the immediate action needed for local log. Crit: Critical level of the critical conditions for local log. Error: Error level of the error conditions for local log. Warning: Warning level of the warning conditions for local log. Notice: Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for local log. Info: Informational level of the informational messages for local log. Debug: Debug level of the debugging messages for local log.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-15 Local Log Setting Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Status Target Severity Action
Description Display the current local log state. Display the current local log target. Display the current local log severity.
: Delete the current status.
67
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.3.3 Remote Syslog
Configure remote syslog on this page. The Remote Syslog page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations. You can also limit the event messages sent to only those messages below a specified level.
The Remote Syslog screens in Figure 4-2-16 & Figure 4-2-17 appear. Figure 4-2-16 Remote Log Target Page Screenshot
68
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object Server Address Server Port Severity
Facility
Description Provide the remote syslog IP address of this switch.
Provide the port number of remote syslog server. Default Port no.: 514 The severity of the local log entry. The following severity types are supported:
Emerg: Emergency level of the system unstable for local log. Alert: Alert level of the immediate action needed for local log. Crit: Critical level of the critical conditions for local log. Error: Error level of the error conditions for local log. Warning: Warning level of the warning conditions for local log. Notice: Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for local log. Info: Informational level of the informational messages for local log. Debug: Debug level of the debugging messages for local log. Local0~7: local user 0~7
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-17 Remote Log Setting Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Status Server Info Severity Facility Action
Description Display the current remote syslog state. Display the current remote syslog server information. Display the current remote syslog severity. Display the current remote syslog facility.
: Delete the remote server entry.
69
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.3.4 Logging Message
The switch log view is provided here. The Log View screens in Figure 4-2-18, Figure 4-2-19 & Figure 4-2-20 appear.
Figure 4-2-18 Log Information Select Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Target Severity
Category
Description The target of the log view entry. The following target types are supported:
Buffered: Target the buffered of the log view. File: Target the file of the log view. The severity of the log view entry. The following severity types are supported: emerg: Emergency level of the system unstable for log view. alert: Alert level of the immediate action needed for log view. crit: Critical level of the critical conditions for log view. error: Error level of the error conditions for log view. warning: Warning level of the warning conditions for log view. notice: Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for log view. info: Informational level of the informational messages for log view. debug: Debug level of the debugging messages for log view. The category of the log view includes: AAA, ACL, CABLE_DIAG, DAI, DHCP_SNOOPING, Dot1X, GVRP, IGMP_SNOOPING, IPSG, L2, LLDP, Mirror, MLD_SNOOPING, Platform, PM, Port, PORT_SECURITY, QoS, Rate, SNMP and STP
Buttons : Click to view log.
70
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-2-19 Logging Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Target Severity Category Total Entries
Description Display the current log target. Display the current log severity. Display the current log category. Display the current log entries.
Figure 4-2-20 Logging Messages Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object No. Timestamp Category Severity Message
Description This is the number for logs. Display the time of log. Display the category type. Display the severity type. Display the log message.
Buttons : Click to clear the log. : Click to refresh the log.
71
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.4 SNMP Management
4.2.4.1 SNMP Overview
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol suite. SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance, find and solve network problems, and plan for network growth. An SNMP-managed network consists of three key components: Network management stations (NMS's), SNMP agents, Management information base (MIB) and network-management protocol: Network management stations (NMS's): Sometimes called consoles, these devices execute management applications
that monitor and control network elements. Physically, NMS's are usually engineering workstation-caliber computers with fast CPUs, megapixel color displays, substantial memory, and abundant disk space. At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment. AgentsAgents are software modules that reside in network elements. They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element. Management information base (MIB)A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store. Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules. Network-management protocolA management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMS's. SNMP is the Internet community's de facto standard management protocol. SNMP Operations SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol. NMS's can send multiple requests without receiving a response. Get -- Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent. Set -- Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent. Trap -- Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event. The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message. SNMP community An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to. It helps define where information is sent. The community name is used to identify the group. An SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community. It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities. SNMP default communities are: Write = private Read = public
72
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.4.2 SNMP Setting
Configure SNMP setting on this page. The SNMP System global setting screens in Figure 4-2-21 & Figure 4-2-22 appear.
Figure 4-2-21 SNMP Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Status
Buttons
Description Indicates the SNMP mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable SNMP mode operation. Disabled: Disable SNMP mode operation.
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-22 SNMP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object SNMP
Description Display the current SNMP status.
73
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.4.3 SNMP Community
Configure SNMP Community on this page. The SNMP Community screens in Figure 4-2-23 & Figure 4-2-24 appear.
Figure 4-2-23 Community Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Community Name Community Mode
Group Name View Name Access Right
Description Indicates the community read/write access string to permit access to SNMP agent. The allowed string length is 0 to 16. Indicates the SNMP community supported mode. Possible versions are: Basic: Set SNMP community mode supported version 1 and 2c. Advanced: Set SNMP community mode supported version 3. A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 16. A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 16. Indicates the SNMP community type operation. Possible types are:
RO=Read-Only: Set access string type in read-only mode. RW=Read-Write: Set access string type in read-write mode.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-24 Community Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Community Name Group Name
Description Display the current community type. Display the current SNMP access group's name.
View Name Access Right Delete
Display the current view name. Display the current access type.
: Delete the community entry.
74
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.4.4 SNMP View
Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page. The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree. The SNMPv3 View Table Setting screens in Figure 4-2-25 and Figure 4-2-26 appear.
Figure 4-2-25 SNMPv3 View Table Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object View Name Subtree OID Subtree OID Mask View Type
Description A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 16. The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view. The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk (*). The bitmask identifies which positions in the specified object identifier are to be regarded as "wildcards" for the purpose of pattern-matching. Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to. Possible view type are: included: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included. excluded: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded.
Buttons
General, if a view entry's view type is 'excluded', it should exist another view entry in which view type is 'included' and its OID subtree oversteps the 'excluded' view entry.
: Click to add a new view entry.
Figure 4-2-26 SNMP View Table Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object View Name Subtree OID OID Mask View Type Action
Description Display the current SNMP view name Display the current SNMP subtree OID Display the current SNMP OID mask Display the current SNMP view type
: Delete the view table entry.
75
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.4.5 SNMP Access Group
Configure SNMPv3 access group on this page. The entry index keys are Group Name, Security Model and Security Level. The SNMPv3 Access Group Setting screens in Figure 4-2-27 & Figure 4-2-28 appear.
Figure 4-2-27 SNMPv3 Access Group Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Group Name Security Model
Security Level
Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name Buttons
Description A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 16. Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:
v1: Reserved for SNMPv1. v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c. V3: Reserved for SNMPv3 or User-based Security Model (USM) Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are: Noauth: None authentication and none privacy security levels are
assigned to the group. auth: Authentication and none privacy. priv: Authentication and privacy. Note: The Security Level applies to SNNPv3 only. Read view name is the name of the view in which you can only view the contents of the agent. The allowed string length is 1 to 16. Write view name is the name of the view in which you enter data and configure the contents of the agent. The allowed string length is 1 to 16. Notify view name is the name of the view in which you specify a notify, inform, or trap.
: Click to add a new access entry.
: Check to delete the entry.
76
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-2-28 SNMP View Table Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Group Name Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name Action
Description Display the current SNMP access group name. Display the current security model. Display the current security level. Display the current read view name. Display the current write view name. Display the current notify view name.
: Delete the access group entry.
77
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.4.6 SNMP User
Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page. Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name. Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group. The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read, write, and notify view. The entry index key is User Name. The SNMPv3 User Setting screens in Figure 4-2-29 & Figure 4-2-30 appear.
Figure 4-2-29 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object User Name Group Privilege Mode
Authentication Protocol
Authentication Password
Encryption Protocol
Description A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 16. The SNMP Access Group. A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:
NoAuth: None authentication and none privacy. Auth: Authentication and none privacy. Priv: Authentication and privacy. The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists. That means you must first ensure that the value is set correctly. Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible authentication protocols are: None: None authentication protocol. MD5: An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5
authentication protocol. SHA: An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA
authentication protocol. The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists. That means you must first ensure that the value is set correctly. A string identifying the authentication pass phrase. For both MD5 and SHA authentication protocols, the allowed string length is 8 to 16. Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible privacy protocol are:
None: None privacy protocol.
78
Encryption Key
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
DES: An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol.
A string identifying the privacy pass phrase. The allowed string length is 8 to 16.
Buttons : Click to add a new user entry.
Figure 4-2-30 SNMPv3 Users Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object User Name
Description Display the current user name.
Group
Display the current group.
Privilege Mode
Display the current privilege mode.
Authentication Protocol Display the current authentication protocol.
Encryption Protocol
Display the current encryption protocol.
Access Right
Display the current access right.
Action
: Delete the user entry.
79
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.4.7 SNMPv1, 2 Notification Recipients
Configure SNMPv1 and 2 notification recipients on this page. The SNMPv1, 2 Notification Recipients screens in Figure 4-2-31 & Figure 4-2-32 appear.
Figure 4-2-31 SNMPv1, 2 Notification Recipients Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object
Description
Server Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination address. It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal
notation ('x.y.z.w'). It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example, '::192.1.2.34'.
SNMP Version
Indicates the SNMP trap supported version. Possible versions are: SNMP v1: Set SNMP trap supported version 1. SNMP v2c: Set SNMP trap supported version 2c.
Notify Type
Set the notify type in traps or informs.
Community Name Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet.
UDP Port
Indicates the SNMP trap destination port. SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port, the
port range is 1~65535.
Time Out
Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout. The allowed range is 1 to 300.
Retries
Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times. The allowed range is 1 to 255.
Buttons
: Click to add a new SNMPv1, 2 host entry.
Figure 4-2-32 SNMPv1, 2 Host Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object
Description
Server Address Display the current server address.
SNMP Version
Display the current SNMP version.
Notify Type
Display the current notify type.
Community Name Display the current community name.
UDP Port
Display the current UDP port.
Time Out
Display the current time out.
Retries
Display the current retry times.
Action
: Delete the SNMPv1, 2 host entry.
80
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.4.8 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients
Configure SNMPv3 notification recipients on this page. The SNMPv1, 2 Notification Recipients screens in Figure 4-2-33 & Figure 4-2-34 appear.
Figure 4-2-33 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Server Address
Notify Type User Name UDP Port
Time Out Retries Buttons
Description Indicates the SNMP trap destination address. It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation ('x.y.z.w'). It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example, '::192.1.2.34'. Set the notify type in traps or informs. Indicates the user string when send SNMP trap packet. Indicates the SNMP trap destination port. SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port, the port range is 1~65535. Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout. The allowed range is 1 to 300. Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times. The allowed range is 1 to 255.
: Click to add a new SNMPv3 host entry.
Figure 4-2-34 SNMPv3 Host Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Server Address Notify Type User Name UDP Port Time Out Retries Action
Description Display the current server address. Display the current notify type. Display the current user name. Display the current UDP port. Display the current time out. Display the current retry times.
: Delete the SNMPv3 host entry.
81
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.4.9 SNMP Engine ID
Configure SNMPv3 Engine ID on this page. The entry index key is Engine ID. The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host. The SNMPv3 Engine ID Setting screens in Figure 4-2-35 & Figure 4-2-36 appear.
Figure 4-2-35 SNMPv3 Engine ID Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Engine ID
Description An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to. The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-36 SNMPv3 Engine ID Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object User Default Engine ID
Description Display the current status. Display the current engine ID.
82
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.4.10 SNMP Remote Engine ID
Configure SNMPv3 remote Engine ID on this page. The SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Setting screens in Figure 4-2-37 & Figure 4-2-38 appear.
Figure 4-2-37 SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Remote IP Address
Engine ID
Description Indicates the SNMP remote engine ID address. It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation ('x.y.z.w'). An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-38 SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Remote IP Address Engine ID Action
Description Display the current remote IP address Display the current engine ID
: Delete the remote IP address entry
83
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.5 RMON 4.2.5.1 RMON Overview
RMON is the most important expansion of the standard SNMP. RMON is a set of MIB definitions, used to define standard network monitor functions and interfaces, enabling the communication between SNMP management terminals and remote monitors. RMON provides a highly efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets. MID of RMON consists of 10 groups. The switch supports the most frequently used group 1, 2, 3 and 9:
Statistics: Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by the Agent. History: Record periodical statistic samples available from Statistics. Alarm: Allow management console users to set any count or integer for sample intervals and alert thresholds for
RMON Agent records.
Event: A list of all events generated by RMON Agent.
Alarm depends on the implementation of Event. Statistics and History display some current or history subnet statistics. Alarm and Event provide a method to monitor any integer data change in the network, and provide some alerts upon abnormal events (sending Trap or record in logs).
4.2.5.2 RMON Statistics
This page provides a Detail of a specific RMON statistics entry; RMON Statistics screen in Figure 4-2-39 appears.
Figure 4-2-39 RMON Statistics Detail Page Screenshot 84
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The Page includes the following fields:
Object Port
Description Select port for this drop down list.
Drop Events Octets Packets Broadcast Packets Multicast Packets CRC/Alignment Errors Undersize Packets
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources. The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network. The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received. The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.
Oversize Packets
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.
Fragments Jabbers Collisions
The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC. The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
64 Bytes Frame
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets
in length.
65~127 Byte Frames The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
65 to 127 octets in length.
128~255 Byte Frames The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
128 to 255 octets in length.
256~511 Byte Frames The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
256 to 511 octets in length.
512~1023 Byte Frames The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
512 to 1023 octets in length.
1024~1518 Byte
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between
Frames
1024 to 1518 octets in length.
Buttons : Click to clear the RMON statistics
85
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.5.3 RMON Event
Configure RMON Event table on this page. The RMON Event screens in Figure 4-2-40 & Figure 4-2-41 appear.
Figure 4-2-40 RMON Event Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Select Index Index Type
Community Owner Description
Description Select index for this drop down list to create new index or modify index. Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535. Indicates the notification of the event, the possible types are: None: The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing
characters. Log: The number of uni-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol. SNMP-Trap: The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets delivered to a
higher-layer protocol. Log and Trap: The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the
packets are normal. Specify the community when trap is sent, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is "public". Indicates the owner of this event, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is a null string. Indicates description of this event, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is a null string.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
86
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-2-41 RMON Event Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Index Event Type Community Description Last Sent Time Owner Action
Description Display the current event index. Display the current event type. Display the current community for SNMP trap. Display the current event description. Display the current last sent time. Display the current event owner.
Click
to delete RMON event entry.
4.2.5.4 RMON Event Log
This page provides an overview of RMON Event Log. The RMON Event Log Table screen in Figure 4-2-42 appears.
Figure 4-2-42 RMON Event Log Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Select Index Index Log Time Description
Description Select index for this drop down list. Indicates the index of the log entry. Indicates Event log time. Indicates the Event description.
87
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.5.5 RMON Alarm
Configure RMON Alarm table on this page. The RMON Alarm screens in Figure 4-2-43 & Figure 4-2-44 appear.
Figure 4-2-43 RMON Alarm Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Select Index Index Sample Port Sample Variable
Description Select index for this drop down list to create the new index or modify the index.
Indicates the index of the alarm entry.
Select port for this drop down list.
Indicates the particular variable to be sampled, the possible variables are: DropEvents: The total number of events in which packets were dropped due
to lack of resources. Octets: The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) bytes.
Includes FCS, but excludes framing bits. Pkts: The total number of frames (bad, broadcast and multicast) received
and transmitted. BroadcastPkts: The total number of good frames received that were
directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets. MulticastPkts: The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address. CRCAlignErrors: The number of CRC/alignment errors (FCS or alignment
88
Sample Interval Sample Type
Rising Threshold
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
errors). UnderSizePkts: The total number of frames received that were less than 64
octets long(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. OverSizePkts: The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. Fragments: The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and had either an FCS or alignment error. Jabbers: The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either an FCS or alignment error. Collisions: The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment. Pkts64Octets: The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Pkts64to172Octets: The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Pkts158to255Octets: The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Pkts256to511Octets: The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Pkts512to1023Octets: The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Pkts1024to1518Octets: The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Sample interval (12147483647).
The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds, possible sample types are: Absolute: Get the sample directly (default). Delta: Calculate the difference between samples. Rising threshold value (02147483647).
89
Falling Threshold Rising Event Falling Event Owner
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Falling threshold value (02147483647). Event to fire when the rising threshold is crossed. Event to fire when the falling threshold is crossed. Specify an owner for the alarm.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-44 RMON Alarm Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Index Sample Port Sample Variable Sample Interval Sample Type Rising Threshold Falling Threshold Rising Event Falling Event Owner Action
Description Indicates the index of Alarm control entry. Display the current sample port. Display the current sample variable. Display the current interval. Display the current sample type. Display the current rising threshold. Display the current falling threshold. Display the current rising event. Display the current falling event. Display the current owner.
Click
to delete RMON alarm entry.
90
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.5.6 RMON History
Configure RMON History table on this page. The RMON History screens in Figure 4-2-45 & Figure 4-2-46 appear.
Figure 4-2-45 RMON History Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Select Index Index Sample Port Bucket Requested
Interval
Owner
Description Select index for this drop down list to create the new index or modify the index. Indicates the index of the history entry. Select port for this drop down list. Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON. The range is from 1 to 50, default value is 50. Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data. The range is from 1 to 3600, default value is 1800 seconds. Specify an owner for the history.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-2-46 RMON History Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Index Data Source Bucket Requested Interval Owner Action
Description Display the current index. Display the current data source. Display the current bucket requested. Display the current interval. Display the current owner.
Click
to delete RMON history entry.
91
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.2.5.7 RMON History Log
This page provides a detail of RMON history entries; screen in Figure 4-2-47 appears.
Figure 4-2-47 RMON History Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object History Index
Buttons
Description Select history index for this drop down list.
: Click to apply changes.
4.2.6 Remote Management
The Managed Switch can support both NMS controller and CloudViewer Sever for remote management. PLANET's NMS Controller is a Network Management System can monitor all kinds of deployed network devices, such as managed switches, media converters, routers, smart APs, VoIP phones, IP cameras, etc., compliant with the SNMP Protocol, ONVIF Protocol and PLANET Smart Discovery utility. The CloudViewer is a free networking service just for PLANET Products. This service provides simplified network monitoring and real-time network status. Working with PLANET CloudViewer app, user can easily check network status, device information, Port and PoE status from Internet. Any other services are not included. The Remote NMS Configuration screens in Figure 4-2-48 appear.
Figure 4-2-48 Remote NMS Configuration Page Screenshot 92
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C The NMS Controller LAN Configuration screens in Figure 4-2-49 appear.
Figure 4-2-49 NMS Controller LAN Configuration Page Screenshot
Object Remote NMS Enable
Description Enable NMS management.
NMS Controller IP address The IP address of NMS Controller.
Authorization Status
Indicate the authorization status of the switch to NMS Controller.
The CloudViewer Server Internet screens in Figure 4-2-50 appear.
Figure 4-2-50 CloudViewer Server Internet Configuration Page Screenshot
Object Remote NMS Enable Subscriber email Password Status
Description Enable NMS management. The email registered on CloudViewer Server. The password of your CloudViewer account. Indicate the status of connecting CloudViewer Server.
93
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3 Switching
Use the Switching menu items to display and configure management functions of the Managed Switch. This section has the
following items:
4.3.1 Port Management
Port Configuration
Configures port configuration settings.
Port Counters
Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics.
Bandwidth Utilization
Displays current bandwidth utilization.
Port Mirroring
Sets the source and target ports for mirroring.
Jumbo Frame
Sets the jumbo frame on the switch.
Port Error Disable Configuration Configures port error disable settings.
Port Error Disabled Status
Disables port error status.
Protected Port
Configures protected ports settings.
EEE
Configures EEE settings.
SFP Module Status
Displays SFP module information.
SFP Module Detail Status
Displays SFP module information.
4.3.2 Link Aggregation
LAG Setting
Configures load balance algorithm configuration settings.
LAG Management
Configures LAG configuration settings.
LAG Port Setting
Configures LAG port settings.
LACP Setting
Configures LACP priority settings.
LACP Port Setting
Configure LACP configuration settings.
LAG Status
Display LAG status / LACP information.
4.3.3 VLAN
Management VLAN
Configures the management VLAN.
Create VLAN
Creates the VLAN group.
Interface Settings
Configures mode and PVID on the VLAN port.
Port to VLAN
Configures the VLAN membership.
Port VLAN Membership
Display the VLAN membership.
Protocol VLAN Group Setting
Configures the protocol VLAN group.
Protocol VLAN Port Setting
Configures the protocol VLAN port setting.
GVRP Setting
Configures GVRP global setting.
GVRP Port Setting
Configures GVRP port setting.
GVRP VLAN
Display the GVRP VLAN database.
GVRP Statistics
Display the GVRP port statistics.
4.3.4 Spanning Tree
STP Global Setting
Configures STP system settings.
STP Port Setting
Configuration per port STP setting.
CIST Instance Setting
Configure system configuration.
CIST Port Setting
Configure CIST port setting.
94
MST Instance Setting MST Port Setting STP Statistics
4.3.5 Multicast Properties Multicast Throttling Setting Multicast Profile Setting 4.3.6 IGMP Snooping IGMP Setting IGMP Querier Setting IGMP Static Group IGMP Group Table IGMP Router Setting IGMP Router Table IGMP Forward All IGMP Snooping Statistics IGMP Filter Setting 4.3.7 MLD Snooping MLD Setting MLD Static Group MLD Group Table MLD Router Setting MLD Router Table MLD Forward All MLD Snooping Statistics MLD Filter Setting 4.3.8 LLDP LLDP Global Setting LLDP Port Setting LLDP Local Device LLDP Remote Device MED Network Policy MED Port Setting LLDP Statistics 4.3.9 MAC Address Table Dynamic Learned
Dynamic Address Setting Static MAC Setting MAC Filtering
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Configuration each MST instance setting. Configuration per port MST setting. Display the STP statistics.
Configures multicast properties. Configures multicast throttling setting. Configures multicast profile setting.
Configure IGMP settings on this page. Configure IGMP querier settings on this page. Configure IGMP static group settings on this page. Configure IGMP group table settings on this page. Configure IGMP router settings on this page. Provide IGMP router table statistics on this page. Configure IGMP forward all settings on this page. Provide IGMP snooping statistics on this page. Configure IGMP filter settings on this page.
Configure MLD settings on this page. Configure MLD static group settings on this page. Configure MLD group table settings on this page. Configure MLD router settings on this page. Provide MLD router table statistics on this page. Configure MLD forward all settings on this page. Provide MLD snooping statistics on this page. Configure MLD filter settings on this page.
Configure LLDP global settings on this page. Configure LLDP port settings on this page. Configure LLDP local device settings on this page. Configure LLDP remote device settings on this page. Configure MED network policy settings on this page. Configure MED port settings on this page. Provide LLDP statistics on this page.
Provide dynamic learned information of whole Ethernet interfaces on this page. Provide aging time setting on this page. Provide static MAC address setting on this page. Provide MAC address filtering setting on this page.
95
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.1 Port Management
Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch's ports.
4.3.1.1 Port Configuration
This page displays current port configurations and status. Ports can also be configured here. The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in a number of columns, which are: The Port Configuration screens in Figure 4-3-1 & Figure 4-3-2 appear.
Figure 4-3-1 Port Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Select Enabled Speed
Duplex
Description Select port number for this drop down list.
Indicates the port state operation. Possible state are: Enabled - Start up the port manually. Disabled Shut down the port manually.
Select any available link speed for the given switch port. Draw the menu bar to select the mode.
Auto - Setup Auto negotiation. Auto-10M - Setup 10M Auto negotiation. Auto-100M - Setup 100M Auto negotiation. Auto-1000M - Setup 1000M Auto negotiation. Auto-10/100M - Setup 10/100M Auto negotiation. 10M - Setup 10M Force mode. 100M - Setup 100M Force mode. 1000M - Setup 1000M Force mode. Select any available link duplex for the given switch port. Draw the menu bar to select the mode. Auto - Setup Auto negotiation. Full - Force sets Full-Duplex mode. Half - Force sets Half-Duplex mode.
96
Flow Control
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
When Auto Speed is selected for a port, this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner. When a fixed-speed setting is selected, that is what is used. Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed. Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted. The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto-Negotiation. Check the configured column to use flow control. This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-3-2 Port Status Page Screenshot
Object Port Description
Description This is the logical port number for this row.
Click
to indicate the port name.
Enable State
Display the current port state.
Link Status
Display the current link status.
Speed
Display the current speed status of the port.
Duplex
Display the current duplex status of the port.
Fiber Speed
Display the current speed status of the fiber port.
Flow Control Configuration Display the current flow control configuration of the port.
Flow Control Status
Display the current flow control status of the port.
97
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.1.2 Port Counters
This page provides an overview of traffic and trunk statistics for all switch ports. The Port Statistics screens in Figure 4-3-3, Figure 4-3-4, Figure 4-3-5 & Figure 4-3-6 appear.
Figure 4-3-3 Port MIB Counters Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Mode
Description
Select port number for this drop down list.
Select port counters mode.
Option:
All Interface Ether-link RMON
Figure 4-3-4 Interface Counters Page Screenshot 98
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Object Received Octets
Received Unicast Packets
Received Unknown Unicast Packets
Received Discards Packets
Transmit Octets
Transmit Unicast Packets
Transmit Unknown Unicast Packets
Transmit Discards Packets
Received Multicast Packets
Received Broadcast Packets
Transmit Multicast Packets
Transmit Broadcast Packets
Description The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters. The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
The number of packets received via the interface which is discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested is transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested is transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent. The number of inbound packets which is chosen to be discarded even though no errors have been detected to prevent from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-) layer, is addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-) layer, addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested is transmitted and is addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested is transmitted, and addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
99
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-5 Ethernet link Counters Page Screenshot
Object Alignment Errors FCS Errors
Single Collision Frames
Multiple Collision Frames
Deferred Transmissions
Late Collision
Excessive Collision
Frame Too Long
Symbol Errors Control In Unknown
Opcodes In Pause Frames Out Pause Frames
Description The number of alignment errors (missynchronized data packets).
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. This count does not include frames received with frame-too-long or frame-too-short error. The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision. A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision. A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy. The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a packet. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions. This counter does not increase when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode. A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceeds the maximum permitted frame size. The number of received and transmitted symbol errors
The number of received control unknown opcodes
The number of received pause frames
The number of transmitted pause frames
100
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-6 RMON Counters Page Screenshot
Object Drop Events Octets
Packets Broadcast Packets
Multicast Packets CRC / Alignment Errors Undersize Packets
Oversize Packets
Fragments
Jabbers
Collisions 64 Bytes Frames
65-127 Byte Frames 128-255 Byte Frames 256-511 Byte Frames 512-1023 Byte Frames 1024-1518 Byte Frames
Description The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources. The total number of octets received and transmitted on the interface, including framing characters. The total number of packets received and transmitted on the interface. The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets. The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address. The number of CRC/alignment errors (FCS or alignment errors). The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and had either an FCS or alignment error. The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either an FCS or alignment error. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment. The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
101
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.1.3 Bandwidth Utilization
The Bandwidth Utilization page displays the percentage of the total available bandwidth being used on the ports. Bandwidth utilization statistics can be viewed using a line graph. The Bandwidth Utilization screen in Figure 4-3-7 appears. To view the port utilization, click on the Port Management folder and then the Bandwidth Utilization link:
Figure 4-3-7 Port Bandwidth Utilization Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Refresh Period
IFG
Description
This shows the period interval between last and next refresh.
Options: 2 sec 5 sec 10 sec
Allow user to enable or disable this function.
102
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.1.4 Port Mirroring
Configure port Mirroring on this page. This function provides monitoring of network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network switch to another port where the packet can be studied. It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary.
To debug network problems, selected traffic can be copied, or mirrored, to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow.
The Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port. You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity.
Figure 4-3-8 Port Mirror Application The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows:
All frames received on a given port (also known as ingress or source mirroring). All frames transmitted on a given port (also known as egress or destination mirroring). Mirror Port Configuration The Port Mirror Configuration screens in Figure 4-3-9 & Figure 4-3-10 appear.
Figure 4-3-9 Port Mirroring Settings Page Screenshot 103
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Description
Session ID
Set the port mirror session ID.
Possible ID are: 1 to 4.
Monitor Session State Enable or disable the port mirroring function.
Destination Port
Select the port to mirror destination port.
Allow-ingress
Frames from ports that have either source (rx) or destination (tx) mirroring enabled are
mirrored to this port.
Sniffer TX Ports
Frames transmitted from these ports are mirrored to the mirroring port. Frames received
are not mirrored.
Sniffer RX Ports
Frames received at these ports are mirrored to the mirroring port.
Frames transmitted are not mirrored.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-10 Mirroring Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Session ID Destination Port Ingress State Source TX Port Source RX Port
Description Display the session ID This is the mirroring port entry Display the ingress state Display the current TX ports Display the current RX ports
104
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.1.5 Jumbo Frame
This page provides to select the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port. The Jumbo Frame screen in Figure 4-3-11 & Figure 4-3-12 appear.
Figure 4-3-11 Jumbo Frame Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Jumbo Frame (Bytes)
Description Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port, including FCS. The allowed range is 1518 bytes to 10000 bytes.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-12 Jumbo Frame Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Jumbo
Description Display the current maximum frame size.
105
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.1.6 Port Error Disabled Configuration
This page provides to set port error disable function. The Port Error Disable Configuration screens in Figure 4-3-13 & Figure 4-3-14 appear.
Figure 4-3-13 Error Disabled Recovery Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Recovery Interval
BPDU Guard Self Loop Broadcast Flood
Unknown Multicast Flood
Unicast Flood ACL Port Security
Violation DHCP Rate Limit
ARP Rate Limit
Description The period (in seconds) for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a port error is detected (and the port action shuts down the port). Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by BPDU guard. Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by self loop. Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by broadcast flood. Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by unknown multicast flood. Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by unicast flood. Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by ACL. Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by port security violation. Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by DHCP rate limit Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by ARP rate limit
106
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-14 Error Disabled Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object
Description
Recovery Interval
Display the current recovery interval time.
BPDU Guard
Display the current BPDU guard status.
Self Loop
Display the current self loop status.
Broadcast Flood
Display the current broadcast flood status.
Unknown Multicast
Display the current unknown multicast flood status.
Flood
Unicast Flood
Display the current unicast flood status.
ACL
Display the current ACL status.
Port Security Violation Display the current port security violation status.
DHCP Rate Limit
Display the current DHCP rate limit status.
ARP Rate Limit
Display the current ARP rate limit status.
107
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.1.7 Port Error Disabled Status
This page provides disable that transitions a port into error disable and the recovery options. The ports were disabled by some protocols such as BPDU Guard, Loopback and UDLD. The Port Error Disable screen in Figure 4-3-15 appears.
The displayed counters are:
Figure 4-3-15 Port Error Disable Page Screenshot
Object Port Name
Description Display the port for error disable.
Error Disable Reason Display the error disabled reason of the port.
Time Left (Seconds)
Display the time left.
108
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.1.8 Protected Ports
Overview When a switch port is configured to be a member of protected group (also called Private VLAN), communication between protected ports within that group can be prevented. Two application examples are provided in this section:
Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the protected group, but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN.
Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment, but are not allowed to communicate with each other
For protected port group to be applied, the Managed switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation. Ports in a protected port group fall into one of these two groups:
Promiscuous (Unprotected) ports -- Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN -- Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN
Isolated (Protected) ports -- Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN -- Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN 109
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs. When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN, the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied. When traffic comes in on an isolated port, the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table. This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN. The port settings relate to the currently unit, as reflected by the page header. The Port Isolation Configuration screens in Figure 4-3-16 & Figure 4-3-17 appear.
Figure 4-3-16 Protected Ports Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port List
Description Select port number for this drop down list.
Port Type Buttons
Displays protected port types. - Protected: A single stand-alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port
and one or more isolated (or host) ports. This VLAN conveys traffic between the isolated ports and a lone promiscuous port. - Unprotected: A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces within a private VLAN. This is the default setting.
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-17 Port Isolation Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Protected Ports Unprotected Ports
Description Display the current protected ports. Display the current unprotected ports.
110
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.1.9 EEE What is EEE
EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is low or no traffic utilization.EEE works by powering down circuits when there is no traffic. When a port gets data to be transmitted all circuits are powered up. The time it takes to power up the circuits is named wakeup time. The default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other link speeds. EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the receiving and transmitting device has all circuits powered up when traffic is transmitted. The devices can exchange wakeup time information using the LLDP protocol. EEE works for ports in auto-negotiation mode, where the port is negotiated to either 1G or 100 Mbit full duplex mode. For ports that are not EEE-capable the corresponding EEE checkboxes are grayed out and thus impossible to enable EEE for. The EEE port settings relate to the currently unit, as reflected by the page header. When a port is powered down for saving power, outgoing traffic is stored in a buffer until the port is powered up again. Because there are some overhead in turning the port down and up, more power can be saved if the traffic can be buffered up until a large burst of traffic can be transmitted. Buffering traffic will give some latency in the traffic. The EEE Port Settings screen in Figure 4-3-18 & Figure 4-3-19 appears.
Figure 4-3-18 EEE Port Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Enable
Description Select port number for this drop down list Enable or disable the EEE function
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-19 EEE Enable Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port EEE State
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current EEE state.
111
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.1.10 SFP Module Status
Managed switch has supported the SFP module with digital diagnostics monitoring (DDM) function, this feature is also known as digital optical monitoring (DOM). You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module Information Page. This Page shows the operational status, such as the transceiver type, speed, wavelength, optical output power, optical input power, temperature, laser bias current and transceiver supply voltage in real time. You can also use the hyperlink of port no. to check the statistics on a specific interface. The SFP Module Status screens in Figure 4-3-20 & Figure 4-3-21 appear.
Figure 4-3-20 Port Selected Page Screenshot with Sample Switch The page includes the following fields:
Object Port
Description Select port number for this drop down list.
Figure 4-3-21 Fiber Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object OE-Present LOS
Description Display the current SFP OE-present. Display the current SFP LOS.
112
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.1.11 SFP Module Detail Status
The SFP Module Detail Status screen in Figure 4-3-22 appears.
Figure 4-3-22 SFP Module Detail Status Page Screenshot with Sample Switch The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Temperature Voltage Current Output Power Input Power Transmit Fault Loss of Signal
Description The logical port for the settings contained in the same row. Display the current SFP temperature. Display the current SFP voltage. Display the current SFP current. Display the current SFP output power. Display the current SFP input power. Display the current SFP transmits fault. Display the current SFP loss of signal.
113
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.2 Link Aggregation
Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups (LAGs). Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices, increases port flexibility, and provides link redundancy. Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed, set to full-duplex operations. Ports in a LAG can be of different media types (UTP/Fiber, or different fiber types) provided they operate at the same speed. Aggregated Links can be assigned manually (Port Trunk) or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on the relevant links. Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port. Specifically, the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non-aggregated port, including auto-negotiation, speed, suplex setting, etc. The device supports the following Aggregation links :
Static LAGs (Port Trunk) Force aggregated selected ports to be a trunk group. Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) LAGs - LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP
ports located on a different device. If the other device ports are also LACP ports, the devices establish a LAG between them.
Figure 4-3-23 Link Aggregation 114
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high-speed redundant links. Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection. This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network. LACP operation requires full-duplex mode. For more detailed information, refer to the IEEE 802.3ad standard.
Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Link aggregation lets you group up to 8 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches. However, before making any physical connections between devices, use the Link Aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends. When using a port link aggregation, note that:
The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type (RJ45, 100 Mbps fiber). The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions (see below). Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation. The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports. None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port. All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added or deleted from a VLAN. The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole. Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop. Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to
avoid creating a data loop.
It allows a maximum of 8 ports to be aggregated at the same time. The Managed Switch supports Gigabit Ethernet ports (up to 8 groups). If the group is defined as an LACP static link aggregation group, then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails. If the group is defined as a local static link aggregation group, then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports.
Use the Link Aggregation Menu to display or configure the Trunk function. This section has the following items:
LAG Setting LAG Management LAG Port Setting LACP Setting LACP Port Setting LAG Status
Configures load balance algorithm configuration settings Configures LAG configuration settings Configures LAG port settings Configures LACP priority settings Configure LACP configuration settings Display LAG status / LACP information
115
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.2.1 LAG Setting
This page allows configuring load balance algorithm configuration settings. The LAG Setting screens in Figure 4-3-24 & Figure 4-3-25 appear.
Figure 4-3-24 LAG Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Load Balance
Algorithm
Description Select load balance algorithm mode: MAC Address: The MAC address can be used to calculate the port for the
frame. IP/MAC Address: The IP and MAC address can be used to calculate the
port for the frame.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-25 LAG Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Load Balance
Algorithm
Description Display the current load balance algorithm.
116
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.2.2 LAG Management
This page is used to configure the LAG management. The LAG Management screens in Figure 4-3-26 & Figure 4-3-27 appear.
Figure 4-3-26 LAG Management Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object LAG Name Type
Ports
Description Select LAG number for this drop down list.
Indicates each LAG name.
Indicates the trunk type Static: Force aggregated selected ports to be a trunk group. LACP: LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device. If the other device ports are also LACP ports, the devices establish a LAG between them. Select port number for this drop down list to establish Link Aggregation.
Figure 4-3-27 LAG Management Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object LAG Name Type Link State Active Member Standby Member Modify
Description The LAG for the settings contained in the same row. Display the current name. Display the current type. Display the link state. Display the active member. Display the standby member.
Click
to modify LAG configuration.
117
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.2.3 LAG Port Setting
This page allows setting configuration for each LAG. The LAG Port Setting screens in Figure 4-3-28 & Figure 4-3-29 appear.
Figure 4-3-28 LAG Port Setting Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object LAG Select Enable Speed
Flow Control
Description Select LAG number for this drop down list.
Indicates the LAG state operation. Possible states are: Enabled - Start up the LAG manually. Disabled Shut down the LAG manually.
Select any available link speed for the given switch port. Draw the menu bar to select the mode.
Auto Set up Auto negotiation. Auto-10M Set up 10M Auto negotiation. Auto-100M Set up 100M Auto negotiation. Auto-1000M - Set up 1000M Auto negotiation. Auto-10/100M Set up 10/100M Auto negotiation. 10M Set up 10M Force mode. 100M Set up 100M Force mode. 1000M Set up 1000M Force mode. When Auto Speed is selected for a port, this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner. When a fixed-speed setting is selected, that is what is used. The current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed. The current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted. The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto-Negotiation. Check the configured column to use flow control. This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
118
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-29 LAG Port Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object LAG Description Port Type Enable State Speed Duplex Flow Control Config Flow Control Status
Description The LAG for the settings contained in the same row Display the current description Display the current port type Display the current enable state Display the current speed Display the current duplex mode Display the current flow control configuration Display the current flow control status
119
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.2.4 LACP Setting
This page is used to configure the LACP system priority setting. The LACP Setting screens in Figure 4-3-30 & Figure 4-3-31 appear.
Figure 4-3-30 LACP Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object System Priority
Buttons
Description A value which is used to identify the active LACP. The Managed Switch with the lowest value has the highest priority and is selected as the active LACP peer of the trunk group.
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-31 LACP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object System Priority
Description Display the current system priority.
120
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.2.5 LACP Port Setting
This page is used to configure the LACP port setting. The LACP Port Setting screens in Figure 4-3-32 & Figure 4-3-33 appear.
Figure 4-3-32 LACP Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Select Priority
Timeout Buttons
Description Select port number for this drop down list to set LACP port setting.
The Priority controls the priority of the port. If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group than is supported by this device, then this parameter will control which ports will be active and which ports will be in a backup role. Lower number means greater priority. The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions. Short will transmit LACP packets each second, while Long will wait for 30 seconds before sending an LACP packet.
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-33 LACP Port Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Name Priority Timeout
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current LACP priority parameter. Display the current timeout parameter.
121
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.2.6 LAG Status
This page displays LAG status. The LAG Status screens in Figure 4-3-34 & Figure 4-3-35 appear.
Figure 4-3-34 LAG Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object LAG Name Type Link State Active Member Standby Member
Description Display the current trunk entry. Display the current LAG name. Display the current trunk type. Display the current link state. Display the current active member. Display the current standby member.
Figure 4-3-35 LACP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object LAG Port PartnerSysId
PnKey
AtKey Sel
Description Display the current LAG ID Display the current port number The system ID of link partner. This field would be updated when the port receives LACP PDU from link partner Port key of partner. This field would be updated when the port receives LACP PDU from link partner Port key of actor. The key is designed to be the same as trunk ID.
LACP selection logic status of the port "S" means selected "U" means unselected
122
Mux Receiv PrdTx AtState PnState
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
"D" means standby
LACP mux state machine status of the port "DETACH" means the port is in detached state "WAIT" means waiting state "ATTACH" means attach state "CLLCT" means collecting state "DSTRBT" means distributing state
LACP receive state machine status of the port "INIT" means the port is in initialize state "PORTds" means port disabled state "EXPR" means expired state "LACPds" means LACP disabled state "DFLT" means defaulted state "CRRNT" means current state
LACP periodic transmission state machine status of the port "no PRD" means the port is in no periodic state "FstPRD" means fast periodic state "SlwPRD" means slow periodic state "PrdTX" means periodic TX state
The actor state field of LACP PDU description.
The field from left to right describes: "LACP_Activity", "LACP_Timeout", "Aggregation", "Synchronization", "Collecting", "Distributing", "Defaulted", and "Expired".
The contents could be true or false. If the contents are false, the web shows "_"; if the contents are true, the web shows "A", "T", "G", "S", "C", "D", "F" and "E" for each content respectively.
The partner state field of LACP PDU description.
The field from left to right describes: "LACP_Activity", "LACP_Timeout", "Aggregation", "Synchronization", "Collecting", "Distributing", "Defaulted", and "Expired".
The contents could be true or false. If the contents are false, the web will show "_"; if the contents are true, the Web shows "A", "T", "G", "S", "C", "D", "F" and "E" for each content respectively.
123
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.3 VLAN 4.3.3.1 VLAN Overview
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout. VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN. VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN. Typically, a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet, although not necessarily. VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth, and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains. A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location. End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN, regardless of where they are physically on the network. Logically, a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain, because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated.
1. No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership, packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN.
2. The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802.1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag-unaware.
The Managed Switch's default is to assign all ports to a single 802.1Q VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN. As new VLAN is created, the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list. The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID = 1.
124
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
This section has the following items: Management VLAN Create VLAN Interface Settings Port to VLAN Port VLAN Membership Protocol VLAN Group Setting Protocol VLAN Port Setting GVRP Setting GVRP Port Setting GVRP VLAN GVRP Statistics
Configures the management VLAN Creates the VLAN group Configures mode and PVID on the VLAN port Configures the VLAN membership Display the VLAN membership
Configures the protocol VLAN group
Configures the protocol VLAN port setting
Configures GVRP global setting Configures GVRP port setting Display the GVRP VLAN database Display the GVRP port statistics
4.3.3.2 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains. This Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains. VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group, and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks. This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment.
An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.
VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections. VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups (such as e-mail), or multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing).
VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic, and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets. VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN.
This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features: Up to 256 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stations can belong to multiple VLANs Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices
125
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
IEEE 802.1Q Standard IEEE 802.1Q (tagged) VLAN are implemented on the Switch. 802.1Q VLAN require tagging, which enables them to span the entire network (assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802.1Q-compliant).
VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains. All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations (over IEEE 802.1Q enabled switches) that are members of that VLAN, and this includes broadcast, multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources.
VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network. IEEE 802.1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN. Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging.:
The untagging feature of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don't recognize VLAN tags in packet headers.
The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802.1Q-compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally.
Some relevant terms: - Tagging - The act of putting 802.1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet. - Untagging - The act of stripping 802.1Q VLAN information out of the packet header.
802.1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802.1Q VLAN tag. There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address. Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field. When a packet's Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100, the packet carries the IEEE 802.1Q/802.1p tag. The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority, 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier (CFI - used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones), and 12 bits of VLAN ID (VID). The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802.1p. The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802.1Q standard. Because the VID is 12 bits long, 4094 unique VLAN can be identified.
The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets. All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained.
802.1Q Tag
User Priority 3 bits
CFI 1 bits
VLAN ID (VID) 12 bits
TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) TCI (Tag Control Information)
2 bytes
2 bytes
Preamble
Destination Address 6 bytes
Source Address 6 bytes
VLAN TAG 4 bytes
Ethernet Type
2 bytes
Data 46-1500 bytes
FCS 4 bytes
126
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address, but before the original Ether Type/Length or Logical Link Control. Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally, the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) must be recalculated.
Adding an IEEE802.1Q Tag
Dest. Addr. Src. Addr. Length/E. type
Data
Old CRC
Original Ethernet
Dest. Addr. Src. Addr. E. type Tag
Length/E. type
Data
New CRC
New Tagged Packet
Priority CFI VLAN ID
Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged (are carrying the 802.1Q VID information) can be transmitted from one 802.1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact. This allows 802.1Q VLAN to span network devices (and indeed, the entire network if all network devices are 802.1Q compliant).
Every physical port on a switch has a PVID. 802.1Q ports are also assigned a PVID, for use within the switch. If no VLAN are defined on the switch, all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1. Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received. Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID, in so far as VLAN are concerned. Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag. Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID, but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions, the VID is.
Tag-aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network. The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet. If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet. Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets, tag-aware and tag-unaware network devices can coexist on the same network.
A switch port can have only one PVID, but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them.
Because some devices on a network may be tag-unaware, a decision must be made at each port on a tag-aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not? If the transmitting port is connected to a tag-unaware device, the packet should be untagged. If the transmitting port is connected to a tag-aware device, the packet should be tagged.
Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN, VID = 1, called "default." The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the "default". As new VLAN are configured in Port-based mode, their respective member ports are removed from the "default."
127
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to the VLAN group(s) in which it will participate. By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs, and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs. Then assign ports on the other VLAN-aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN(s), either manually or dynamically using GVRP. However, if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs, but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs, then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port.
VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware network interconnection devices, but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end-node host that does not support VLAN tagging.
VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port). But if the frame is tagged, the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame. Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups, such as file servers or printers. Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap, but still need to communicate, you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch. Untagged VLANs Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security. A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch. Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN. Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets.
128
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.3.3 Management VLAN
Configure Management VLAN on this page. The screens in Figure 4-3-36 & Figure 4-3-37 appear.
Figure 4-3-36 Management VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Management VLAN
Description Provide the managed VLAN ID
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-37 Management VLAN State Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Management VLAN
Description Display the current management VLAN.
129
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.3.4 Create VLAN
Create/delete VLAN on this page. The screens in Figure 4-3-38 & Figure 4-3-39 appear.
Figure 4-3-38 VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN List VLAN Action VLAN Name Prefix
Description Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN. This column allows users to add or delete VLANs. Indicates the name of this particular VLAN.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-39 VLAN Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID VLAN Name VLAN Type Modify
Description Display the current VLAN ID entry. Display the current VLAN ID name. Display the current VLAN ID type.
Click
to modify VLAN configuration.
130
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.3.5 Interface Settings
This page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN. The VLAN per Port Configuration Page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN. The port default VLAN ID (PVID) is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration Page. All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID.
Understand nomenclature of the Switch
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged and Untagged Every port on an 802.1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged.
Tagged:
Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number, priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports. If a packet has previously been tagged, the port will not alter the packet, thus keeping the VLAN information intact. The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802.1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet-forwarding decisions.
Untagged: Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802.1Q tag from all packets that flow into those
ports. If the packet doesn't have an 802.1Q VLAN tag, the port will not alter the packet. Thus,
all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802.1Q VLAN
information. (Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch). Untagging is
used to send packets from an 802.1Q-compliant network device to a non-compliant network
device.
Frame Income Frame Leave
Income Frame is tagged
Income Frame is untagged
Leave port is tagged
Frame remains tagged
Tag is inserted
Leave port is untagged
Tag is removed
Frame remain untagged
Table 4-5-1: Ingress / Egress Port with VLAN VID Tag / Untag Table
IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (Q-in-Q) IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (QinQ) is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks. QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer-specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs. This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN (SPVLAN) tags into the customer's frames when they enter the service provider's network, and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network.
A service provider's customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported. VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service-provider network might easily overlap, and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed. Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations, require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables, and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096.
131
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge, aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN (Metro Access Network) space. One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers' VLANs. This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN-related VID for frames entering the MAN. When leaving the MAN, the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer-related VID is again available. This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags. All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8, where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags. In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch, the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports. This way, the MAC table requirements is reduced. Edit Interface Setting The Edit Interface Setting/Status screens in Figure 4-3-40 & Figure 4-3-41 appear.
Figure 4-3-40 Edit Interface Setting Page Screenshot
132
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Select Interface VLAN Mode
PVID Accepted Type
Ingress Filtering
Uplink TPID
Description Select port number for this drop down list to set VLAN port setting.
Set the port in access, trunk, hybrid and tunnel mode. Trunk means the port allows traffic of multiple VLANs. Access indicates the port belongs to one VLAN only. Hybrid means the port allows the traffic of multi-VLANs to pass in tag or untag mode. Tunnel configures IEEE 802.1Q tunneling for a downlink port to another device within the customer network.
Allows you to assign PVID to selected port. The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port. The PVID must be the same as the VLAN ID that the port belongs to VLAN group, or the untagged traffic will be dropped. The range for the PVID is 1-4094. Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames. This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If the port only accepts tagged frames, untagged frames received on the port are discarded. Options:
All Tag Only Untag Only By default, the field is set to All. If ingress filtering is enabled (checkbox is checked), frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of get discarded. If ingress filtering is disabled, frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of are accepted and forwarded to the switch engine. However, the port will never transmit frames classified to VLANs that it is not a member of. Enable/disable uplink function in trunk port.
Configure the type (TPID) of the protocol of switch trunk port.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
133
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-41 Edit Interface Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port
Description The switch port number of the logical port.
Interface VLAN Mode Display the current interface VLAN mode.
PVID
Display the current PVID.
Accepted Frame Type Display the current access frame type.
Ingress Filtering
Display the current ingress filtering.
Uplink
Display the current uplink mode.
TPID
Display the current TPID.
134
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.3.6 Port to VLAN
Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index. This page allows you to add and delete port members of each VLAN. The screen in Figure 4-3-42 appears.
Figure 4-3-42 Port to VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object
Description
VLAN ID
Select VLAN ID for this drop down list to assign VLAN membership.
Port
The switch port number of the logical port.
Interface VLAN Mode Display the current interface VLAN mode.
Membership
Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port
or trunk:
Forbidden: Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP.
Excluded: Interface is not a member of the VLAN. Packets associated with this VLAN will
not be transmitted by the interface.
Tagged:
Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the port will be
tagged, that is, carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information.
Untagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the port will be
untagged, that is, not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS
information. Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as
an untagged port.
PVID
Display the current PVID
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
135
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.3.7 Port VLAN Membership
This page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users. The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4-3-43 appears.
Figure 4-3-43 Port VLAN Membership Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Mode Administrative VLANs Operational VLANs Modify
Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current VLAN mode Display the current administrative VLANs Display the current operational VLANs
Click
to modify VLAN membership
136
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.3.8 Protocol VLAN Group Setting
The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN. This may require non-standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol. This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs, including security and easy accessibility.
To avoid these problems, you can configure this Managed Switch with protocol-based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol. When a frame is received at a port, its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type being used by the inbound packets.
Command Usage To configure protocol-based VLANs, follow these steps: 1. First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use. Although not mandatory, we suggest configuring a
separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network. Do not add port members at this time. 2. Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Configuration
page. 3. Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Port Configuration page. This page allows you to configure protocol-based VLAN Group Setting. The protocol-based VLAN screens in Figure 4-3-44 & Figure 4-3-45 appear.
Figure 4-3-44 Add Protocol VLAN Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Group ID Frame Type
Protocol Value (0x0600-0xFFFE)
Buttons
Description Protocol Group ID assigned to the Special Protocol VLAN Group. Frame Type can have one of the following values:
Ethernet II IEEE802.3_LLC_Other RFC_1042 Note: On changing the Frame type field, valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected. Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the preceding Frame Type selection menu. Valid values for frame type ranges from 0x0600-0xfffe
: Click to apply changes.
137
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-45 Protocol VLAN Group State Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Group ID Frame Type Protocol Value Delete
Description Display the current group ID. Display the current frame type. Display the current protocol value.
Click
to delete the group ID entry.
138
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.3.9 Protocol VLAN Port Setting
This page allows you to map an already configured Group Name to a VLAN/port for the switch. The Protocol VLAN Port Setting/State screens in Figure 4-3-46 & Figure 4-3-47 appear.
Figure 4-3-46 Protocol VLAN Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Group VLAN
Description Select port for this drop down list to assign protocol VLAN port. Select group ID for this drop down list to protocol VLAN group. VLAN ID assigned to the Special Protocol VLAN Group.
Buttons : Click to add protocol VLAN port entry.
Figure 4-3-47 Protocol VLAN Port State Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Group ID VLAN ID Delete
Description Display the current port. Display the current group ID. Display the current VLAN ID.
Click
to delete the group ID entry.
139
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.3.10 GVRP Setting
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network.
VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network. GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch. The GVRP Global Setting/Information screens in Figure 4-3-48 & Figure 4-3-49 appear.
Figure 4-3-48 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot 140
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object GVRP
Description Controls whether GVRP is enabled or disabled on this switch.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-49 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object GVRP Status Join Timeout Leave Timeout LeaveAll Timeout
Description Display the current GVRP status. Display the current join timeout parameter. Display the current leave timeout parameter. Display the current leaveall timeout parameter.
141
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.3.11 GVRP Port Setting
The GVRP Port Setting/Status screens in Figure 4-3-50 & Figure 4-3-51 appear.
Figure 4-3-50 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Select GVRP Enabled Registration Mode
VLAN Creation
Description Select port for this drop down list to assign protocol VLAN port.
Controls whether GVRP is enabled or disabled on port.
By default GVRP ports are in normal registration mode. These ports use GVRP join messages from neighboring switches to prune the VLANs running across the 802.1Q trunk link. If the device on the other side is not capable of sending GVRP messages, or if you do not want to allow the switch to prune any of the VLANs, use the fixed mode. Fixed mode ports will forward for all VLANs that exist in the switch database. Ports in forbidden mode forward only for VLAN 1. GVRP can dynamically create VLANs on switches for trunking purposes. By enabling GVRP dynamic VLAN creation, a switch will add VLANs to its database when it receives GVRP join messages about VLANs it does not have.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
142
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-51 GVRP Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Enable Status Registration Mode VLAN Creation Status
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current GVRP port state. Display the current registration mode. Display the current VLAN creation status.
4.3.3.12 GVRP VLAN
The GVRP VLAN Database screen in Figure 4-3-52 appears.
Figure 4-3-52 GVRP VLAN Database Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Member Ports Dynamic Ports VLAN Type
Description Display the current VLAN ID. Display the current member ports. Display the current dynamic ports. Display the current VLAN type.
143
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.3.13 GVRP Statistics
The GVRP Port Statistics and Error Statistics screens in Figure 4-3-53 & Figure 4-3-54 appear.
Figure 4-3-53 GVRP Port Statistics Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Join Empty (Rx/Tx) Empty (Rx/Tx) Leave Empty (Rx/Tx) Join In (Rx/Tx) Leave In (Rx/Tx) LeaveAll (Rx/Tx)
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current join empty (TX/RX) packets. Display the current empty (TX/RX) packets. Display the current leave empty (TX/RX) packets. Display the current join in (TX/RX) packets. Display the current leave in (TX/RX) packets. Display the current leaveall (TX/RX) packets.
144
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-54 GVRP Port Error Statistics Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Invalid Protocol ID Invalid Attribute Type Invalid Attribute Value Invalid Attribute Length
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current invalid protocol ID. Display the current invalid attribute type. Display the current invalid attribute value. Display the current invalid attribute length
Invalid Event
Display the current invalid event.
Buttons
: Click to clear the GVRP Error Statistics.
: Click to refresh the GVRP Error Statistics.
145
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.3.14 VLAN setting example:
- Separate VLANs - 802.1Q VLAN Trunk
4.3.3.14.1 Two separate 802.1Q VLANs
The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handles Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs. VLAN Group 2 and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLANs. Each VLAN isolates network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members. The screen in Figure 4-3-55 appears and Table 4-3-1 describes the port configuration of the Managed Switches.
Figure 4-3-55 Two Separate VLAN Diagrams
VLAN Group VLAN Group 1 VLAN Group 2 VLAN Group 3
VID
Untagged Members
1
Port-7~Port-8
2
Port-1,Port-2
3
Port-4,Port-5
Tagged Members N/A
Port-3 Port-6
Table 4-3-1 VLAN and Port Configuration
146
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C The scenario described as follows: Untagged packet entering VLAN 2
1. While [PC-1] transmits an untagged packet enters Port-1, the Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag=2. [PC-2] and [PC-3] will received the packet through Port-2 and Port-3.
2. [PC-4], [PC-5] and [PC-6] received no packet. 3. While the packet leaves Port-2, it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untagged packet. 4. While the packet leaves Port-3, it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=2. Tagged packet entering VLAN 2 1. While [PC-3] transmits a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=2 enters Port-3, [PC-1] and [PC-2] will receive the packet
through Port-1 and Port-2. 2. While the packet leaves Port-1 and Port-2, it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untagged packet. Untagged packet entering VLAN 3 1. While [PC-4] transmits an untagged packet enters Port-4, the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag=3. [PC-5] and
[PC-6] will receive the packet through Port-5 and Port-6. 2. While the packet leaves Port-5, it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untagged packet. 3. While the packet leaves Port-6, it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=3.
In this example, VLAN Group 1 is set as default VLAN, but only focuses on VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 traffic flow.
Setup Steps 1. Create VLAN Group 2 and 3
Add VLAN group 2 and group 3
147
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C 2. Assign VLAN mode and PVID to each port:
Port-1,Port-2 and Port-3 : VLAN Mode = Hybrid, PVID=2 Port-4,Port-5 and Port-6 : VLAN Mode = Hybrid, PVID=3
3. Assign Tagged/Untagged to each port: VLAN ID = 2: Port-1 & 2 = Untagged, Port-3 = Tagged, Port -4~6 = Excluded.
VLAN ID = 3: Port-4 & 5 = Untagged, Port -6 = Tagged, Port-1~3 = Excluded.
148
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.3.14.2 VLAN Trunking between two 802.1Q aware switches
In most cases, they are used for "Uplink" to other switches. VLANs are separated at different switches, but they need to access other switches within the same VLAN group. The screen in Figure 4-3-56 appears.
Figure 4-3-56 VLAN Trunking between two 802.1Q aware switches Setup steps 1. Create VLAN Group 2 and 3
Add VLAN group 2 and group 3
149
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C 2. Assign VLAN mode and PVID to each port:
Port-1,Port-2 and Port-3 : VLAN Mode = Hybrid, PVID=2 Port-4,Port-5 and Port-6 : VLAN Mode = Hybrid, PVID=3 Port-7 : VLAN Mode = Hybrid, PVID=1
3. Assign Tagged/Untagged to each port: VLAN ID = 1: Port-1~6 = Untagged, Port -7 = Excluded.
150
VLAN ID = 2: Port-1 & 2 = Untagged, Port-3 & 7 = Tagged, Port -4~6 = Excluded.
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
VLAN ID = 3: Port-4 & 5 = Untagged, Port -6 & 7= Tagged, Port-1~3 = Excluded.
151
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.4 Spanning Tree Protocol
4.3.4.1 Theory
The Spanning Tree Protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down. The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions:
STP Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D) RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w) MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s)
The IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network. When multiple links between switches are detected, a primary link is established. Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links. The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link. Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled, primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically. The reactivation of the blocked links (at the time of a primary link failure) is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention.
This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users. However, the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood. It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured. Please read the following before making any changes from the default values. The Switch STP performs the following functions:
Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements. Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch, in user specified
groups. Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure, addition, or removal of any element in
the tree. Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention. Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology, the following information is used: The unique switch identifier The path cost to the root associated with each switch port The port identifier
152
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs). Each BPDU contains the following information:
The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch The path cost to the root from the transmitting port The port identifier of the transmitting port The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning-tree topology. All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU. BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch, but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU, and, if the topology changes, initiates a BPDU transmission. The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following: One switch is elected as the root switch The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch A designated switch is selected. This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded
to the root. A port for each switch is selected. This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch. Ports included in the STP are selected.
Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link. If all switches have STP enabled with default settings, the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch. By increasing the priority (lowering the priority number) of the best switch, STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch.
When STP is enabled using the default parameters, the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal. For instance, connecting higher-speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root-port change.
STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network. This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops. Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets. They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology. The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change. In addition, STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change.
Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states: Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database, but not yet forwarding packets Forwarding the port is forwarding packets Disabled the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first
153
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C A port transitions from one state to another as follows:
From initialization (switch boot) to blocking From blocking to listening or to disabled From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled From forwarding to disabled From disabled to blocking
Figure 4-3-57 STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software. When you enable STP, every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up. If properly configured, each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state. No packets (except BPDUs) are forwarded from, or received by, STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port.
2. STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation: the switch level and the port level. The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches. The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports. The STP operates in much the same way for both levels.
On the switch level, STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root Bridge and the Designated Bridges. On the port level, STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports.
154
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the switch level:
Parameter Bridge Identifier(Not user configurable except by setting priority below) Priority
Hello Time Maximum Age Timer
Forward Delay Timer
Description
Default Value
A combination of the User-set priority and 32768 + MAC
the switch's MAC address.
The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts:
a 16-bit priority and a 48-bit Ethernet MAC
address 32768 + MAC
A relative priority for each switch lower
32768
numbers give a higher priority and a greater
chance of a given switch being elected as
the root bridge
The length of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds
the hello message by the switch
Measures the age of a received BPDU for a 20 seconds
port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded
when its age exceeds the value of the
maximum age timer.
The amount time spent by a port in the
15 seconds
learning and listening states waiting for a
BPDU that may return the port to the
blocking state.
The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level:
Variable Port Priority
Port Cost
Description A relative priority for each port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port A value used by STP to evaluate paths STP calculates path costs and selects the path with the minimum cost as the active path
Default Value 128
200,000-100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports 20,000-1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports 0 - Auto
Default Spanning-Tree Configuration
Feature Enable state Port priority Port cost Bridge Priority
Default Value STP disabled for all ports 128 0 32,768
155
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C User-Changeable STA Parameters The Switch's factory default setting should cover the majority of installations. However, it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory; unless, it is absolutely necessary. The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows: Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535. 0 is equal to the highest Priority.
Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds. This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge. If you set a Hello Time for your Switch, and it is not the Root Bridge, the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge.
The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max. Age. Otherwise, a configuration error will occur.
Max. Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds. At the end of the Max Age, if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge, your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge. If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier, it will become the Root Bridge.
Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds. This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state.
Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters: Max. Age _ 2 x (Forward Delay - 1 second) Max. Age _ 2 x (Hello Time + 1 second)
Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port.
Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets.
156
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C 3. Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram. In this example, you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied. If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B, switch B will broadcast it to switch C, and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on. The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop, potentially causing a network failure. In this example, STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C. The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings.
Now, if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C, then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there. Setting-up STP using values other than the defaults, can be complex. Therefore, you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges/ports and block loop connections. Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting, or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is, however, relatively straight forward.
Figure 4-3-58 Before Applying the STA Rules
157
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C In this example, only the default STP values are used.
Figure 4-3-59 After Applying the STA Rules
The switch with the lowest Bridge ID (switch C) was elected the root bridge, and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C. The two (optional) Gigabit ports (default port cost = 20,000) on switch A are connected to one (optional) Gigabit port on both switch B and C. The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link (default port cost = 200,000). Gigabit ports could be used, but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link.
This section has the following items: STP Global Setting STP Port Setting CIST Instance Setting CIST Port Setting MST Instance Setting MST Port Setting STP Statistics
Configures STP system settings Configuration per port STP setting Configure system configuration Configure CIST port setting Configuration each MST instance setting Configuration per port MST setting Display the STP statistics
158
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.4.2 STP Global Settings
This page allows you to configure STP system settings. The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch. The Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols:
Compatiable -- Spanning Tree Protocol (STP):Provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and eliminating loops.
Normal -- Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP): Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence, without creating forwarding loops.
Extension Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP): Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs (VLANs). This "Per-VLAN" Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning Tree.
The STP Global Settings screens in Figure 4-3-60 & Figure 4-3-61 appear.
Figure 4-3-60 Global Settings Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Enable
BPDU Forward PathCost Method
Force Version
Description Enable or disable the STP function. The default value is "Disabled". Set the BPDU forward method. The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. The STP protocol version setting. Valid values are STP-Compatible,
159
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
RSTP-Operation and MSTP-Operation.
Configuration Name
Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.
Configuration Revision Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.
The values allowed are between 0 and 65535.
The default value is 0.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-61 STP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object STP
Description Display the current STP state.
BPDU Forward
Display the current BPDU forward mode.
Cost Method
Display the current cost method.
Force Version
Display the current force version.
Configuration Name
Display the current configuration name.
Configuration Revision Display the current configuration revision.
160
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.4.3 STP Port Setting
This page allows you to configure per port STP settings. The STP Port Setting screens in Figure 4-3-62 & Figure 4-3-63 appear.
Figure 4-3-62 STP Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object
Description
Port Select
Select port number for this drop down list.
External Cost (0 = Controls the path cost incurred by the port.
Auto)
The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the
802.1D recommended values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be
entered.
The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network. Lower path cost
ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in
the range 1 to 200000000.
Edge Port
Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as beeing set or cleared. (The initial
operEdge state when a port is initialized).
BPDU Filter
Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs.
BPDU Guard P2P MAC Migrate
Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU. The port will enter the error-disabled state, and will be removed from the active topology. Controls whether the port connects to a point-to-point LAN rather than a shared medium. This can be automatically determined, or forced either true or false. Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point-to-point LANs than for shared media. (This applies to physical ports only. Aggregations are always forced Point2Point). If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re-check the appropriate BPDU format (RSTP or STP-compatible) to send on the selected interfaces. (Default: Disabled)
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
161
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port, and configures the path cost
according to the values shown below. Path cost "0" is used to indicate auto-configuration mode. When the short path cost
method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to
65,535.
Port Type
IEEE 802.1D-1998
IEEE 802.1w-2001
Ethernet
50-600
200,000-20,000,000
Fast Ethernet
10-60
20,000-2,000,000
Gigabit Ethernet 3-10
2,000-200,000
Table 4-3-2 Recommended STP Path Cost Range
Port Type Ethernet
Fast Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet
Link Type
IEEE 802.1D-1998
Half Duplex
100
Full Duplex
95
Trunk
90
Half Duplex
19
Full Duplex
18
Trunk
15
Full Duplex
4
Trunk
3
Table 4-3-3 Recommended STP Path Costs
IEEE 802.1w-2001 2,000,000 1,999,999 1,000,000 200,000 100,000 50,000 10,000 5,000
Port Type Ethernet
Fast Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet
Link Type
IEEE 802.1w-2001
Half Duplex
2,000,000
Full Duplex
1,000,000
Trunk
500,000
Half Duplex
200,000
Full Duplex
100,000
Trunk
50,000
Full Duplex
10,000
Trunk
5,000
Table 4-3-4 Default STP Path Costs
162
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-63 STP Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Admin Enable External Cost Edge Port BPDU Filter BPDU Guard P2P MAC
Description The switch port number of the logical STP port. Display the current STP port mode status. Display the current external cost. Display the current edge port status. Display the current BPDU filter configuration. Display the current BPDU guard configuration. Display the current P2P MAC status.
163
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.4.4 CIST Instance Setting
This Page allows you to configure CIST instance settings. The CIST Instance Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-3-64 & Figure 4-3-65 appear.
Figure 4-3-64: CIST Instance Setting Page Screenshot The Page includes the following fields:
Object priority
Max Hops Forward Delay
Max Age Tx Hold Count
Description Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have better priority. The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier.
For MSTP operation, this is the priority of the CIST. Otherwise, this is the priority of the STP/RSTP bridge.
This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region. It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops.
The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding (used in STP compatible mode). Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds
-Default: 15 -Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1] -Maximum: 30 The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds. -Default: 20 -Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)]. -Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay -1)] The number of BPDU's a bridge port can send per second.
164
Hello Time
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
When exceeded, transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed. Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU's per second. The time that controls the switch to send out the BPDU packet to check STP current status. Enter a value between 1 through 10.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-65 CIST Instance Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Priority Max Hop Forward Delay Max Age Tx Hold Count Hello Time
Description Display the current CIST priority. Display the current Max. hop. Display the current forward delay. Display the current Max.Age. Display the current Tx hold count. Display the current hello time.
165
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.4.5 CIST Port Setting
This page allows you to configure per port CIST priority and cost. The CIST Port Setting and Status screens in Figure 4-3-66 & Figure 4-3-67 appear.
Figure 4-3-66 CIST Port Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Select Priority
Internal Path Cost (0 = Auto)
Description Select port number for this drop down list.
Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost. (See above).
Default: 128 Range: 0-240, in steps of 16
Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
166
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-67 CIST Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port
Description The switch port number of the logical STP port.
Indentifier (Priority / Port ID)
External Path Cost Conf/Oper
Internal Path Cost Conf/Oper
Designated Root Bridge
External Root Cost
Display the current indentifier (Priority / Port ID). Display the current external path cost conf/oper. Display the current internal path cost/oper. Display the current designated root bridge. Display the current external root cost.
Regional Root Bridge Display the current regional root bridge.
Internal Root Cost
Display the current internal root cost.
Designated Bridge
Display the current designated bridge.
Internal Port Path Cost Display the current internal port path cost.
Edge Port Conf/Oper Display the current edge port conf/oper.
P2P MAC Conf/Oper
Display the current P2P MAC conf/oper.
Port Role
Display the current port role.
Port State
Display the current port state.
167
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.4.6 MST Instance Configuration
This page allows the user to configure MST Instance Configuration. The MST Instance Setting, Information and Status screens in Figure 4-3-68, Figure 4-3-69 & Figure 4-3-70 appear.
Figure 4-3-68 MST Instance Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object MSTI ID
VLAN List (1-4096)
Priority
Description Allow to assign MSTI ID. The range for the MSTI ID is 1-15. Allow to assign VLAN list to special MSTI ID. The range for the VLAN list is 1-4094. Controls the bridge priority. Lower numerical values have better priority. The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-69 MSTI Instance Setting Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object MSTI Status VLAN List VLAN Count Priority
Description Display the current MSTI entry. Display the current MSTI status. Display the current VLAN list. Display the current VLAN count. Display the current MSTI priority.
168
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-70 MST Instance Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object MSTI ID
Description Display the MSTI ID.
Regional Root Bridge Display the current designated root bridge.
Internal Root Cost
Display the current internal root cost.
Designated Bridge
Display the current designated bridge.
Root Port
Display the current root port.
Max Age
Display the current max. age.
Forward Delay
Display the current forward delay.
Remaining Hops
Display the current remaining hops.
Last Topology Change Display the current last topology change.
169
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.4.7 MST Port Setting
This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations, and possibly change them as well. A MSTI port is a virtual port, which is instantiated separately for each active CIST (physical) port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port. The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options. This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports. The aggregation settings are global. The MSTI Ports Setting screens in Figure 4-3-71 & Figure 4-3-72 appear.
Figure 4-3-71 MST Port Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object MST ID
Description Enter the special MST ID to configure path cost & priority.
Port Select
Select port number for this drop down list.
Priority
Internal Path Cost (0 = Auto)
Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost. Controls the path cost incurred by the port.
The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered.
The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports.
Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000.
Buttons : Click to apply changes. 170
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-72 MST Port Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object MSTI ID
Description Display the current MSTI ID.
Port
The switch port number of the logical STP port.
Indentifier (Priority / Port ID)
Internal Path Cost Conf/Oper
Regional Root Bridge
Display the current indentifier (priority / port ID). Display the current internal path cost configuration / operation. Display the current regional root bridget.
Internal Root Cost
Display the current internal root cost.
Designated Bridge
Display the current designated bridge.
Internal Path Cost
Display the current internal path cost.
Port Role
Display the current port role.
Port State
Display the current port state.
171
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.4.8 STP Statistics
This page displays STP statistics. The STP statistics screen in Figure 4-3-73 appears.
Figure 4-3-73 STP Statistics Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port
Description The switch port number of the logical STP port.
Configuration BPDUs Received Display the current configuration BPDUs received.
TCN BPDUs Received
Display the current TCN BPDUs received.
MSTP BPDUs Received
Display the current MSTP BPDUs received.
Configuration BPDUs Transmitted
TCN BPDUs Transmitted
Display the configuration BPDUs transmitted. Display the current TCN BPDUs transmitted.
MSTP BPDUs Transmitted
Display the current BPDUs transmitted.
172
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.5 Multicast
This section has the following items: Properties IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Statistics MLD Snooping MLD Snooping Statistics Multicast Throttling Setting Multicast Filter
Configures multicast properties Configures IGMP snooping settings Display the IGMP snooping statistics Configures MLD snooping settings Display the MLD snooping statistics
Configures multicast throttling setting
Configures multicast filter
4.3.5.1 Properties
This page provides multicast properties related configuration. The multicast Properties and Information screen in Figure 4-3-74 & Figure 4-3-75 appear.
Figure 4-3-74 Properties Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Unknown Multicast
Action
Description Unknown multicast traffic method: Drop, flood or send to router port.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-75 Properties Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Unknown Multicast Action Forward Method For IPv4 Forward Method For IPv6
Description Display the current unknown multicast action status. Display the current IPv4 multicast forward method. Display the current IPv6 multicast forward method.
173
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.5.2 Multicast Throttling Setting
Multicast throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the switch can take one of two actions; either "deny" or "replace". If the action is set to deny, any new multicast join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group. Once you have configured multicast profiles, you can assign them to interfaces on the Managed Switch. Also you can set the multicast throttling number to limit the number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time. The MAX Group and Information screens in Figure 4-3-76 & Figure 4-3-77 appear.
Figure 4-3-76 Max Groups and Action Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object IP Type Port Select Max Groups
Action
Description Select IPv4 or IPv6 for this drop down list.
Select port number for this drop down list.
Sets the maximum number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time. Range: 0-256; Default: 256 Sets the action to take when the maximum number of multicast groups for the interface has been exceeded. (Default: Deny) -Deny - The new multicast group join report is dropped. -Replace - The new multicast group replaces an existing group.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
174
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-77 IGMP Port Max Groups Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Max Groups Action
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current Max groups. Display the current action.
175
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.5.3 Multicast Profile Setting
In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users. For example, an IP/TV service is based on a specific subscription plan. The multicast filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port. Multicast filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port. A multicast filter profile can contain one or more, or a range of multicast addresses; but only one profile can be assigned to a port. When enabled, multicast join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile. If a requested multicast group is permitted, the multicast join report is forwarded as normal. If a requested multicast group is denied, the multicast join report is dropped. When you have created a Multicast profile number, you can then configure the multicast groups to filter and set the access mode. Command Usage Each profile has only one access mode; either permit or deny. When the access mode is set to permit, multicast join reports are processed when a multicast group falls within the
controlled range. When the access mode is set to deny, multicast join reports are only processed when the multicast group is not in the
controlled range. The Add Profile and Profile Status screens in Figure 4-3-78 & Figure 4-3-79 appear.
Figure 4-3-78 Add Profile Setting Page Screenshot
176
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object IP Type Profile Index Group from
Group to
Action
Description Select IPv4 or IPv6 for this drop down list.
Indicates the ID of this particular profile.
Specifies multicast groups to include in the profile. Specify a multicast group
range by entering a start IP address.
Specifies multicast groups to include in the profile. Specify a multicast group
range by entering an end IP address.
Sets the access mode of the profile; either permit or deny.
- Permit
Multicast join reports are processed when a multicast group falls
within the controlled range.
- Deny
When the access mode is set to, multicast join reports are only
processed when the multicast group is not in the controlled
range.
Buttons : Click to add multicast profile entry.
Figure 4-3-79 IGMP/MLD Profile Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Index IP Type Group from Group to Action Modify
Description Display the current index. Display the current IP Type. Display the current group from. Display the current group to. Display the current action.
Click
to edit parameter.
Click
to delete the MLD/IGMP profile entry.
177
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.6 IGMP Snooping
The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships. IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing. The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group. About the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group. The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is used to communicate this information. IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active. In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network, one router is elected as the `queried'. This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members. The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not. The router can check, using IGMP, to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work. If there are no members on a sub network, packets will not be forwarded to that sub network.
Multicast Service
178
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Multicast Flooding
IGMP Snooping Multicast Stream Control
179
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time. IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group. IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112. It has a fixed packet size and no optional data. The format of an IGMP packet is shown below: IGMP Message Format
Octets
0
8
16
31
Type
Response Time
Checksum
Group Address (all zeros if this is a query)
The IGMP Type codes are shown below:
Type 0x11
0x11
0x16 0x17 0x12
Meaning Membership Query (if Group Address is 0.0.0.0) Specific Group Membership Query (if Group Address is Present) Membership Report (version 2) Leave a Group (version 2) Membership Report (version 1)
IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups, on their respective sub networks. The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP. A host sends an IGMP "report" to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group (for version 1).
A host will send a "leave" report when it wants to leave a group (for version 2). Multicast routers send IGMP queries (to the all-hosts group address: 224.0.0.1) periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks. If there is no response from a particular group, the router assumes that there are no group members on the network.
The Time-to-Live (TTL) field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks.
IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN, an explicit leave message, and query messages that are specific to a given group.
The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below:
180
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
IGMP State Transitions
IGMP Querier A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If there is more than one router/switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected "querier" and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members. It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service. Multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.
181
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.6.1 IGMP Setting
This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration. Most of the settings are global, whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the current unit, as reflected by the page header. The IGMP Snooping Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-3-80, Figure 4-3-81 & Figure 4-3-82 appear.
Figure 4-3-80 IGMP Snooping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object IGMP Snooping Status
Description Enable or disable the IGMP snooping. The default value is "Disabled".
IGMP Snooping Version
IGMP Snooping Report Suppression
Buttons
Sets the IGMP Snooping operation version. Possible versions are: v2: Set IGMP Snooping supported IGMP version 2. v3: Set IGMP Snooping supported IGMP version 3.
Limits the membership report traffic sent to multicast-capable routers. When you disable report suppression, all IGMP reports are sent as is to multicast-capable routers. The default is enabled.
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-81 IGMP Snooping Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object
Description
IGMP Snooping Status
Display the current IGMP snooping status.
IGMP Snooping Version Display the current IGMP snooping version.
IGMP Snooping V2 Report Display the current IGMP snooping v2 report suppression.
Suppression
182
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-82 IGMP Snooping Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Entry No.
Description Display the current entry number.
VLAN ID IGMP Snooping Operation Status Router Ports Auto Learn
Display the current VLAN ID. Display the current IGMP snooping operation status. Display the current router ports auto learning.
Query Robustness Query Interval (sec.) Query Max Response Interval
(sec.)
Display the current query robustness. Display the current query interval. Display the current query max response interval.
Last Member Query count
Display the current last member query count.
Last Member Query Interval (sec) Display the current last member query interval.
Immediate Leave Modify
Display the current immediate leave.
Click
to edit parameter.
183
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.6.2 IGMP Querier Setting
This page provides IGMP Querier Setting. The IGMP Querier Setting screens in Figure 4-3-83 & Figure 4-3-84 appear.
Figure 4-3-83 IGMP VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Querier State
Querier Version
Description Select VLAN ID for this drop down list.
Enable or disable the querier state. The default value is "Disabled". Sets the querier version for compatibility with other devices on the network. Version: 2 or 3; Default: 2
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-84 IGMP Querier Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Querier State Querier Status Querier Version Querier IP
Description Display the current VLAN ID. Display the current querier state. Display the current querier status. Display the current querier version. Display the current querier IP.
184
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.6.3 IGMP Static Group
Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in above sections. For certain applications that require tighter control, you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the Managed Switch. First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN, and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group.
- Static multicast addresses are never aged out. - When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN, the corresponding traffic can only be
forwarded to ports within that VLAN. The IGMP Static Group configuration screens in Figure 4-3-85 & Figure 4-3-86 appear.
Figure 4-3-85 Add IGMP Static Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Group IP Address Member Ports
Description Select VLAN ID for this drop down list The IP address for a specific multicast service Select port number for this drop down list
Buttons
: Click to add IGMP router port entry.
Figure 4-3-86 IGMP Static Groups Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Group IP Address Member Ports Modify
Description Display the current VLAN ID. Display the current group IP address. Display the current member ports.
Click
to edit parameter
185
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.6.4 IGMP Group Table
This page provides Multicast Database. The IGMP Group Table screen in Figure 4-3-87 appears.
Figure 4-3-87 IGMP Group Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Group IP Address Member Port Type
Life(Sec)
Description Display the current VID. Display multicast IP address for a specific multicast service. Display the current member port. Member types displayed include Static or Dynamic, depending on selected options. Display the current life.
186
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.6.5 IGMP Router Setting
Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router/ switch connected over the network to an interface (port or trunk) on your Managed Switch, you can manually configure the interface (and a specified VLAN) to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router. This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the Managed Switch. The IGMP Router Setting and Status screens in Figure 4-3-88 & Figure 4-3-89 appear.
Figure 4-3-88 Add Router Port Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Type
Static Ports Select Forbid Port Select
Description Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router. Sets the Router port type. The types of Router port as below:
Static Forbid Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier. Specify which ports un-act as router ports
Buttons
: Click to add IGMP router port entry.
Figure 4-3-89 Router Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Static Ports Forbidden Ports Modify
Description Display the current VLAN ID. Display the current static ports. Display the current forbidden ports.
Click
to edit parameter.
Click
to delete the group ID entry.
187
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.6.6 IGMP Router Table
This page provides Router Table. The Dynamic, Static and Forbidden Router Table screens in Figure 4-3-90, Figure 4-3-91 & Figure 4-3-92 appear.
Figure 4-3-90 Dynamic Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Port Expiry Time (Sec)
Description Display the current VLAN ID. Display the current dynamic router ports. Display the current expiry time.
Figure 4-3-91 Static Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Port Mask
Description Display the current VLAN ID. Display the current port mask.
Figure 4-3-92 Forbidden Router Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Port Mask
Description Display the current VLAN ID. Display the current port mask.
188
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.6.7 IGMP Forward All
This page provides IGMP Forward All. The Forward All screen in Figure 4-3-93 appears.
Figure 4-3-93 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Port Membership
Description Select VLAN ID for this drop down list to assign IGMP membership.
The switch port number of the logical port.
Select IGMP membership for each interface:
Forbidden: Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the IGMP via MVR.
None:
Interface is not a member of the VLAN. Packets associated with this
VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface.
Static:
Interface is a member of the IGMP.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
189
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.6.8 IGMP Snooping Statics
This page provides IGMP Snooping Statics. The IGMP Snooping Statics screen in Figure 4-3-94 appears.
Figure 4-3-94 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Total RX Valid RX Invalid RX Other RX Leave RX Report RX General Query RX Special Group Query RX Special Group & Source Query RX Leave TX Report TX General Query TX Special Group Query TX Special Group & Source Query TX
Description Display current total RX. Display current valid RX. Display current invalid RX. Display current other RX. Display current leave RX. Display current report RX. Display current general query RX. Display current special group query RX. Display current special group & source query RX. Display current leave TX. Display current report TX. Display current general query TX. Display current special group query TX. Display current special group & source query TX.
Buttons
: Click to clear the IGMP Snooping Statistics.
: Click to refresh the IGMP Snooping Statistics. 190
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.6.9 IGMP Filter Setting
The Filter Setting and Status screens in Figure 4-3-95 & Figure 4-3-96 appear.
Figure 4-3-95 Filter Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Select Filter Profile ID
Description Select port number for this drop down list. Select filter profile ID for this drop down list.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-96 Port Filter Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Filter Profile ID Action
Description Display the current port. Display the current filter profile ID.
Click
to display detail profile parameter.
Click
to delete the IGMP filter profile entry.
191
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.7 MLD Snooping 4.3.7.1 MLD Setting
This page provides MLD Snooping related configuration. Most of the settings are global, whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the current unit, as reflected by the page header. The MLD Snooping Setting, Information and Table screens in Figure 4-3-97, Figure 4-3-98 & Figure 4-3-99 appear.
Figure 4-3-97 MLD Snooping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object MLD Snooping Status MLD Snooping Version
MLD Snooping Report Suppression
Description Enable or disable the MLD snooping. The default value is "Disabled".
Sets the MLD Snooping operation version. Possible versions are: v1: Set MLD Snooping supported MLD version 1. v2: Set MLD Snooping supported MLD version 2.
Limits the membership report traffic sent to multicast-capable routers. When you disable report suppression, all MLD reports are sent as is to multicast-capable routers. The default is enabled.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-98 MLD Snooping information Page Screenshot 192
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object MLD Snooping Status
Description Display the current MLD snooping status.
MLD Snooping Version
Display the current MLD snooping version.
MLD Snooping Report Suppression Display the current MLD snooping report suppression.
Figure 4-3-99 MLD Snooping Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Entry No.
Description Display the current entry number.
VLAN ID
Display the current VLAN ID.
MLD Snooping Operation Status Display the current MLD snooping operation status.
Router Ports Auto Learn
Display the current router ports auto learning.
Query Robustness
Display the current query robustness.
Query Interval (sec.)
Display the current query interval.
Query Max Response Interval (sec.)
Last Member Query count
Display the current query max response interval. Display the current last member query count.
Last Member Query Interval (sec) Display the current last member query interval.
Immediate Leave
Display the current immediate leave.
Modify
Click
to edit parameter.
193
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.7.2 MLD Static Group
The MLD Static Group configuration screens in Figure 4-3-100 & Figure 4-3-101 appear.
Figure 4-3-100 Add MLD Static Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Group IP Address Member Ports
Description Select VLAN ID for this drop down list. The IP address for a specific multicast service. Select port number for this drop down list.
Buttons : Click to add IGMP router port entry.
Figure 4-3-101 MLD Static Groups Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Group IPv6 Address Member Ports Modify
Description Display the current VLAN ID. Display the current group IPv6 address. Display the current member ports.
Click
to edit parameter..
194
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.7.3 MLD Group Table
This page provides MLD Group Table. The MLD Group Table screen in Figure 4-3-102 appears.
Figure 4-3-102 MLD Group Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Group IP Address Member Port Type
Life(Sec)
Description Display the current VID. Display multicast IP address for a specific multicast service. Display the current member port. Member types displayed include Static or Dynamic, depending on selected options. Display the current life.
195
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.7.4 MLD Router Setting
Depending on your network connections, MLD snooping may not always be able to locate the MLD querier. Therefore, if the MLD querier is a known multicast router/ switch connected over the network to an interface (port or trunk) on your Managed Switch, you can manually configure the interface (and a specified VLAN) to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router. This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the Managed Switch. The MLD Router Setting screens in Figure 4-3-103 & Figure 4-3-104 appear.
Figure 4-3-103 Add Router Port Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID
Description Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router
Type
Static Ports Select Forbid Port Select Buttons
Sets the Router port type. The types of Router port as below: Static Forbid
Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier. Specify which ports un-act as router ports
: Click to add MLD router port entry.
Figure 4-3-104 Router Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Static Ports Forbidden Ports Modify
Description Display the current VLAN ID. Display the current static ports. Display the current forbidden ports.
Click
to edit parameter.
Click
to delete the group ID entry.
196
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.7.5 MLD Router Table
This page provides Router Table. The Dynamic, Static and Forbidden Router Table screens in Figure 4-3-105, Figure 4-3-106 & Figure 4-3-107 appear.
Figure 4-3-105 Dynamic Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID
Description Display the current VLAN ID.
Port
Display the current dynamic router ports.
Expiry Time (Sec)
Display the current expiry time.
Figure 4-3-106 Static Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID
Description Display the current VLAN ID.
Port Mask
Display the current port mask.
Figure 4-3-107 Forbidden Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Port Mask
Description Display the current VLAN ID Display the current port mask
197
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.7.6 MLD Forward All
This page provides MLD Forward All. The Forward All screen in Figure 4-3-108 appears.
Figure 4-3-108 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Port Membership
Description Select VLAN ID for this drop down list to assign MLD membership
The switch port number of the logical port
Select MLD membership for each interface:
Forbidden: Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the MLD via MVR.
None:
Interface is not a member of the VLAN. Packets associated with
this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface.
Static:
Interface is a member of the MLD.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
198
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.7.7 MLD Snooping Statics
This page provides MLD Snooping Statics. The MLD Snooping Statics screen in Figure 4-3-109 appears.
Figure 4-3-109 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object
Description
Total RX
Display current total RX.
Valid RX
Display current valid RX.
Invalid RX
Display current invalid RX.
Other RX
Display current other RX.
Leave RX
Display current leave RX.
Report RX
Display current report RX.
General Query RX
Display current general query RX.
Special Group Query RX
Display current special group query RX.
Special Group & Source Query RX Display current special group & source query RX.
Leave TX
Display current leave TX.
Report TX
Display current report TX.
General Query TX
Display current general query TX.
Special Group Query TX
Display current special group query TX
Special Group & Source Query TX Display current special group & source query TX
Buttons
: Click to clear the MLD Snooping Statistics.
: Click to refresh the MLD Snooping Statistics. 199
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.7.8 MLD Filter Setting
The Filter Setting and Status screens in Figure 4-3-110 & Figure 4-3-111 appear.
Figure 4-3-110 Filter Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Select
Description Select port number for this drop down list
Filter Profile ID Buttons
Select filter profile ID for this drop down list
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-111 Port Filter Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port
Filter Profile ID Action
Description Display the current port. Display the current filter profile ID.
Click
to display detail profile parameter.
Click
to delete the MLD filter profile entry.
200
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.8 LLDP 4.3.8.1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain. LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device. Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according to the IEEE 802.1ab standard, and can include details such as device identification, capabilities and configuration settings. LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches. The LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy, power, inventory, and device location details. LLDP and LLDP-MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting, enhance network management, and maintain an accurate network topology.
4.3.8.2 LLDP Global Setting
This Page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings. The LLDP Global Setting and Config screens in Figure 4-3-112 & Figure 4-3-113 appear.
Figure 4-3-112 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Enable
Description Globally enable or disable LLDP function
LLDP PDU Disable Action
Transmission Interval
Set LLDP PDU disable action: include "Filtering", "Bridging" and "Flooding". Filtering: discrad all LLDP PDU. Bridging: transmit LLDP PDU in the same VLAN. Flooding: transmit LLDP PDU for all port.
The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the
201
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
network discovery information up-to-date. The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Transmission Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 5 - 32768 seconds. Default: 30 seconds
Holdtime Multiplier
This attribute must comply with the following rule:
(Transmission Interval * Hold Time Multiplier) 65536, and Transmission Interval >= (4 * Delay Interval) Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid. The LLDP information valid period is set to Holdtime multiplied by Transmission Interval seconds. Valid values are restricted to 2 - 10 times.
Reinitialization Delay Transmit Delay
TTL in seconds is based on the following rule:
(Transmission Interval * Holdtime Multiplier) 65536.
Therefore, the default TTL is 4*30 = 120 seconds. When a port is disabled, LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units, signaling that the LLDP information isn't valid anymore. Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 10 seconds. If some configuration is changed (e.g. the IP address) a new LLDP frame is transmitted, but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Transmit Delay seconds. Transmit Delay cannot be larger than 1/4 of the Transmission Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 8192 seconds.
LLDP-MED Fast Start Repeat Count
Buttons
This attribute must comply with the rule: (4 * Delay Interval) Transmission Interval
Configures the amount of LLDP MED Fast Start LLDPDUs to transmit during the activation process of the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanisim.
Range: 1-10 packets; Default: 3 packets The MED Fast Start Count parameter is part of the timer which ensures that the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism is active for the port. LLDP-MED Fast Start is critical to the timely startup of LLDP, and therefore integral to the rapid availability of Emergency Call Service.
: Click to apply changes.
202
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-113 LLDP Global Config Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object LLDP Enable LLDP PDU Disable Action
Description Display the current LLDP status. Display the current LLDP PDU disable action.
Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier Reinitialization Delay Transmit Delay LLDP-MED Fast Start Repeat Count
Display the current transmission interval. Display the current holdtime multiplier. Display the current reinitialization delay. Display the current transmit delay. Display the current LLDP-MED Fast Start Repeat Count.
4.3.8.3 LLDP Port Setting
Use the LLDP Port Setting to specify the message attributes for individual interfaces, including whether messages are transmitted, received, or both transmitted and received. The LLDP Port Configuration and Status screens in Figure 4-3-114 & Figure 4-3-115 appear.
Figure 4-3-114 LLDP Port Configuration and Optional TLVs Selection Page Screenshot 203
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Select State
Port Select Optional TLV Select
Description Select port for this drop down list
Enables LLDP messages transmit and receive modes for LLDP Protocol Data Units. Options:
Tx only Rx only TxRx Disabled Select port for this drop down list Configures the information included in the TLV field of advertised messages.
System Name: When checked the "System Name" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
Port Description: When checked the "Port Description" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
System Description: When checked the "System Description" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
System Capability: When checked the "System Capability" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
802.3 MAC-PHY: When checked the "802.3 MAC-PHY" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
802.3 Link Aggregation: When checked the "802.3 Link Aggregation" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
802.3 Maximum Frame Size: When checked the "802.3 Maximum Frame Size" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
Management Address: When checked the "Management Address" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
802.1 PVID: When checked the "802.1 PVID" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
Buttons : Click to apply changes
204
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-115 LLDP Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port State Selected Optional TLVs
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current LLDP status. Display the current selected optional TLVs.
The VLAN Name TLV VLAN Selection and LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status screens in Figure 4-3-116 & Figure 4-3-117 appear.
Figure 4-3-116 VLAN Name TLV Selection Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Select VLAN Select
Description Select port for this drop down list. Select VLAN for this drop down list.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
205
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-117 LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Selected VLAN
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current selected VLAN.
4.3.8.4 LLDP Local Device
Use the LLDP Local Device Information screen to display information about the switch, such as its MAC address, chassis ID, management IP address, and port information. The Local Device Summary and Port Status screens in Figure 4-3-118 & Figure 4-3-119 appear.
Figure 4-3-118 Local Device Summary Page Screenshot 206
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object Chassis ID Subtype
Description Display the current chassis ID subtype.
Chassis ID
Display the current chassis ID.
System Name
Display the current system name.
System Description
Display the current system description.
Capabilities Supported Display the current capabilities supported.
Capabilities Enabled Display the current capabilities enabled.
Port ID Subtype
Display the current port ID subtype.
Figure 4-3-119 Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port LLDP Status LLDP MED Status
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current LLDP status. Display the current LLDP MED Status.
207
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.8.5 LLDP Remove Device
This Page provides a status overview for all LLDP remove devices. The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected. The LLDP Remove Device screen in Figure 4-3-120 appears.
Figure 4-3-120 LLDP Remote Device Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Local Port Chassis ID Subtype Chassis ID Port ID Subtype Port ID System Name Time to Live
Description Display the current local port. Display the current chassis ID subtype. The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor's LLDP frames. Display the current port ID subtype. The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port. System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit. Display the current time to live.
Buttons : Click to delete LLDP remove device entry. : Click to refresh LLDP remove device.
208
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.8.6 MED Network Policy
Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration, along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes, which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port. Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service.
Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific 'real-time' network policy requirements, such as interactive voice and/or video services. The network policy attributes advertised are:
1. Layer 2 VLAN ID (IEEE 802.1Q-2003) 2. Layer 2 priority value (IEEE 802.1D-2004) 3. Layer 3 Diffserv code point (DSCP) value (IETF RFC 2474)
This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port. The application types specifically addressed are:
1. Voice 2. Guest Voice 3. Softphone Voice 4. Video Conferencing 5. Streaming Video 6. Control / Signaling (conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above) A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization, and different policies per application type. LLDP-MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port, each corresponding to a different application type. Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies, based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration. It should be noted that LLDP-MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints, and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN. The Voice Auto Mode Configuration, Network Policy Configuration and LLDP MED Network Policy Table screen in Figure 4-3-121 & Figure 4-3-122 appears.
209
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-121 Voice Auto Mode Configuration and Network Policy Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object LLDP MED Policy for
Voice Application Network Policy
Number Application Type
Description Set the LLDP MED policy for voice application mode
Select network policy number for this drop down list
Intended use of the application types: Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications. Voice Signaling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy. Guest Voice - support a separate 'limited feature-set' voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services. Guest Voice Signaling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy.
210
VLAN ID Tag
L2 Priority DSCP
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices, such as PCs or laptops. This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs, if at all, and are typically configured to use an 'untagged' VLAN or a single 'tagged' data specific VLAN. When a network policy is defined for use with an 'untagged' VLAN (see Tagged flag below), then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance.
Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.
App Streaming Video - for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type.
Video Signaling - for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy.
VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003
Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a 'tagged' or an 'untagged' VLAN. Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003. In this case, both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance.
Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format, and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used, as well as the DSCP value. The tagged format includes an additional field, known as the tag header. The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels (0 through 7), as defined by IEEE 802.1D-2004. A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802.1D-2004.
DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values (0 through 63). A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475.
211
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-122 LLDP MED Network Policy Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Network Policy Number Application VLAN ID VLAN Tag L2 Priority DSCP Value
Description Display the current network policy number. Display the current application. Display the current VLAN ID. Display the current VLAN tag status. Display the current L2 priority. Display the current DSCP value.
Buttons : Click to delete LLDP MED network policy table entry.
212
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.8.7 MED Port Setting
The Port LLDP MED Configuration/Port Setting Table screens in Figure 4-3-123 & Figure 4-3-124 appear.
Figure 4-3-123 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Select MED Enable MED Optional TVLs
MED Network Policy
Description Select port for this drop down list
Enable or disable MED configuration
Configures the information included in the MED TLV field of advertised messages.
-Network Policy This option advertises network policy configuration information, aiding in the discovery and diagnosis of VLAN configuration mismatches on a port. Improper network policy configurations frequently result in voice quality degradation or complete service disruption.
-Location This option advertises location identification details. -Inventory This option advertises device details useful for inventory management, such as manufacturer, model, software version and other pertinent information. Select MED network policy for this drop down list
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
213
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-124 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port LLDP MED Status Active Application Location Inventory
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current LLDP MED status. Display the current active status. Display the current application. Display the current location. Display the current inventory.
The MED Location Configuration and LLDP MED Port Location Table screens in Figure 4-3-125 & Figure 4-3-126 appear.
Figure 4-3-125 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot 214
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Location Coordinate Location Civic Address Location ESC ELIN
Description Select port for this drop down list. A string identifying the Location Coordinate that this entry should belong to . A string identifying the Location Civic Address that this entry should belong to. A string identifying the Location ESC ELIN that this entry should belong to.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-126 LLDP MED Port Location Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Coordinate Civic Address ESC ELIN
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current coordinate. Display the current civic address. Display the current ESC ELIN.
215
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.8.8 LLDP Statistics
Use the LLDP Device Statistics screen to general statistics for LLDP-capable devices attached to the switch, and for LLDP protocol messages transmitted or received on all local interfaces. The LLDP Global and Port Statistics screens in Figure 4-3-127 & Figure 4-3-128 appear.
Figure 4-3-127 LLDP Global Statistics Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Insertions Deletions Drops Age Outs
Description Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot. Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot. Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full. Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time-To-Live expiring.
Buttons : Click to clear the statistics
: Click to refresh the statistics
216
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-3-128 LLDP Port Statistics Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port
Description The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.
TX Frame Total
The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port.
RX Frame Total
The number of LLDP frames received on the port.
RX Frame Discarded RX Frame Error
If an LLDP frame is received on a port, and the switch's internal table has run full, the LLDP frame is counted and discarded. This situation is known as "Too Many Neighbors" in the LLDP standard. LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table. Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down, an LLDP shutdown frame is received, or when the entry ages out. The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error.
RX TLVs Discarded
RX TLVs Unrecognized
RX Ageout - Total
Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information, known as TLVs (TLV is short for "Type Length Value"). If a TLV is malformed, it is counted and discarded. The number of well-formed TLVs, but with an unknown type value
The number of organizationally TLVs received
217
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.9 MAC Address Table
Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame. The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to (based upon the DMAC address in the frame). This table contains both static and dynamic entries. The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports.
The frames also contain a MAC address (SMAC address), which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame. The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses. Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time.
4.3.9.1 Dynamic Learned
Dynamic MAC Table Dynamic Learned MAC Table is shown on this page. The MAC Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address. The Dynamic Learned screens in Figure 4-3-129 & Figure 4-3-130 appear.
Figure 4-3-129 Dynamic Learned Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port VLAN MAC Address
Description Select port for this drop down list. Select VLAN for this drop down list. Physical address associated with this interface.
Buttons
: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields
: Flushes all dynamic entries
Figure 4-3-130 MAC Address Information Page Screenshot 218
Object MAC Address VLAN Type Port Buttons
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Description The MAC address of the entry The VLAN ID of the entry Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry The ports that are members of the entry
: Click to add dynamic MAC address to static MAC address.
4.3.9.2 Dynamic Address Setting
By default, dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds. The Dynamic Address Setting/Status screens in Figure 4-3-131 & Figure 4-3-132 appear.
Figure 4-3-131 Dynamic Addresses Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Aging Time
Buttons
Description The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range: 10-630 seconds; Default: 300 seconds
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-3-132 Dynamic Addresses Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Aging Time
Description Display the current aging time
219
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.9.3 Static MAC Setting
The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table. The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address. The Static MAC Setting screens in Figure 4-3-133 & Figure 4-3-134 appear.
Figure 4-3-133 Statics MAC Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object MAC Address VLAN Port
Description Physical address associated with this interface. Select VLAN for this drop down list. Select port for this drop down list.
Buttons : Click to add new static MAC address.
Figure 4-3-134 Statics MAC Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object No. MAC Address VLAN Port Delete
Description This is the number for entries. The MAC address for the entry. The VLAN ID for the entry. Display the current port.
Click
to delete static MAC status entry
220
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.3.9.4 MAC Filtering
By filtering MAC address, the switch can easily filter the per-configured MAC address and reduce the un-safety. The Static MAC Setting screens in Figure 4-3-135 & Figure 4-3-136 appear.
Figure 4-3-135 MAC Filtering Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object MAC Address VLAN (1~4096)
Description Physical address associated with this interface. Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN.
Buttons : Click to add new MAC filtering setting.
Figure 4-3-136 Statics MAC Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object No. MAC Address VLAN Delete
Description This is the number for entries. The MAC address for the entry. The VLAN ID for the entry.
Click
to delete static MAC status entry.
221
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4 Quality of Service
4.4.1 Understanding QoS
Quality of Service (QoS) is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic. QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic, such as multi-media, video, protocol-specific, time critical, and file-backup traffic. QoS reduces bandwidth limitations, delay, loss, and jitter. It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network. You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic. You can use QoS on your system to:
Control a wide variety of network traffic by: Classifying traffic based on packet attributes. Assigning priorities to traffic (for example, to set higher priorities to time-critical or business-critical applications). Applying security policy through traffic filtering. Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing
delay and jitter. Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows. Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network. Manage network congestion. To implement QoS on your network, you need to carry out the following actions: 1. Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic. 2. Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch. 3. Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier. 4. Apply a QoS profile to a port(s).
The QoS page of the Managed Switch contains three types of QoS mode - the 802.1p mode, DSCP mode or Port-base mode can be selected. Both the three mode rely on predefined fields within the packet to determine the output queue.
802.1p Tag Priority Mode The output queue assignment is determined by the IEEE 802.1p VLAN priority tag. IP DSCP Mode - The output queue assignment is determined by the TOS or DSCP field in the IP packets. Port-Base Priority Mode Any packet received from the specify high priority port will treated as a high priority
packet. The Managed Switch supports eight priority level queue, the queue service rate is based on the WRR(Weight Round Robin) and WFQ (Weighted Fair Queuing) alorithm. The WRR ratio of high-priority and low-priority can be set to "4:1 and 8:1.
222
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.2 General 4.4.2.1 QoS Properties
The QoS Global Setting and Information screen in Figure 4-4-1 & Figure 4-4-2 appear.
Figure 4-4-1 QoS Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object QoS Mode
Description Enable or disable QoS mode
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
QoS Information
Figure 4-4-2 QoS Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object QoS Mode
Description Display the current QoS mode.
223
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.2.2 QoS Port Settings
The QoS Port Settings and Status screen in Figure 4-4-3 & Figure 4-4-4 appear.
Figure 4-4-3 QoS Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object
Description
Port Select
Select port number for this drop down list.
CoS Value
Select CoS value for this drop down list.
Remark CoS
Disable or enable remark CoS.
Remark DSCP
Disable or enable remark DSCP.
Remark IP Precedence Disable or enable remark IP Precedence.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
QoS Port Status
Figure 4-4-4 QoS Port Status Page Screenshot 224
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object
Description
Port
The switch port number of the logical port
CoS Value
Display the current CoS value
Remark CoS
Display the current remark CoS
Remark DSCP
Display the current remark DSCP
Remark IP Precedence Display the current remark IP precedence
4.4.2.3 Queue Settings
The Queue Table and Information screens in Figure 4-4-5 & Figure 4-4-6 appear.
Figure 4-4-5 Queue Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Queue Strict Priority WRR Weight
% of WRR Bandwidth Buttons
Description Display the current queue ID Controls whether the scheduler mode is "Strict Priority" on this switch port Controls whether the scheduler mode is "Weighted" on this switch port Controls the weight for this queue. This value is restricted to 1-100. This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler Mode" is set to "Weighted". Display the current bandwidth for each queue
: Click to apply changes.
225
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-4-6 Queue Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Information Name Information Value
Description Display the current queue method information. Display the current queue value information.
4.4.2.4 CoS Mapping
The CoS to Queue and Queue to CoS Mapping screens in Figure 4-4-7 & Figure 4-4-8 appear.
Figure 4-4-7 CoS to Queue and Queue to CoS Mapping Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Queue
Description Select Queue value for this drop down list.
Class of Service Buttons
Select CoS value for this drop down list.
: Click to apply changes.
226
CoS Mapping
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-4-8 CoS Mapping Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object CoS Mapping to Queue Queue Mapping to CoS
Description Display the current CoS value. Display the current mapping to queue. Display the current queue value. Display the current mapping to CoS.
227
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.2.5 DSCP Mapping
The DSCP to Queue and Queue to DSCP Mapping screens in Figure 4-4-9 & Figure 4-4-10 appear.
Figure 4-4-9 DSCP to Queue and Queue to DSCP Mapping Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object DSCP Queue
Description Select DSCP value for this drop down list. Select Queue value for this drop down list.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
228
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-4-10 DSCP Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object DSCP Mapping to Queue Queue Mapping to DSCP
Description Display the current CoS value Display the current mapping to queue Display the current queue value Display the current mapping to DSCP
229
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.2.6 IP Precedence Mapping
The IP Precedence to Queue and Queue to IP Precedence Mapping screens in Figure 4-4-11 & Figure 4-4-12 appear.
Figure 4-4-11 IP Precedence to Queue and Queue to IP Precedence Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Queue IP Precedence
Description Select Queue value for this drop down list Select IP Precedence value for this drop down list
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-4-12 IP Precedence Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object IP Precedence Mapping to Queue Queue Mapping to IP Precedence
Description Display the current CoS value. Display the current mapping to queue. Display the current queue value. Display the current mapping to IP Precedence.
230
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.3 QoS Basic Mode 4.4.3.1 Global Settings
The Basic Mode Global Settings and QoS Information screen in Figure 4-4-13 & Figure 4-4-14 appear.
Figure 4-4-13 Basic Mode Global Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Trust Mode
Description Set the QoS mode.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
QoS Information
Figure 4-4-14 QoS Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Trust Mode
Description Display the current QoS mode.
231
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.3.2 Port Settings
The QoS Port Setting and Status screen in Figure 4-4-15 & Figure 4-4-16 appear.
Figure 4-4-15 Basic Mode Global Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Trust Mode Buttons
Description Select port number for this drop down list. Enable or disable the trust mode.
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-4-16 QoS Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Trust Mode
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current trust type.
232
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.4 Bandwidth Control
Configure the switch port rate limit for the switch port on this page.
4.4.4.1 Ingress Bandwidth Control
This page provides to select the ingress bandwidth preamble. The Ingress Bandwidth Control Setting and Status screens in Figure 4-4-17 & Figure 4-4-18 appear.
Figure 4-4-17 Ingress Bandwidth Control Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port State Rate (Kbps)
Description Select port number for this drop down list. Enable or disable the port rate policer. The default value is "Disabled". Configure the rate for the port policer. The default value is "unlimited". Valid values are in the range 16 to 1000000.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-4-18 Ingress Bandwidth Control Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Ingress Rate Limit (Kbps)
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current ingress rate limit.
233
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.4.2 Egress Bandwidth Control
This page provides to select the egress bandwidth preamble. The Egress Bandwidth Control Setting and Status screens in Figure 4-4-19 & Figure 4-4-20 appear.
Figure 4-4-19 Egress Bandwidth Control Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port State Rate (Kbps)
Buttons
Description Select port number for this drop down list. Enable or disable the port rate policer. The default value is "Disabled". Configure the rate for the port policer. The default value is "unlimited". Valid values are in the range 16 to 1000000.
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-4-20 Egress Bandwidth Control Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Egress Rate Limit (Kbps)
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current egress rate limit.
234
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.4.3 Egress Queue
The Egress Queue Bandwidth Control Settings and Status screens in Figure 4-4-21 & Figure 4-4-22 appear.
Figure 4-4-21 Egress Queue Bandwidth Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Queue State CIR (Kbps)
Buttons
Description Select port number for this drop down list. Select queue number for this drop down list. Enable or disable the port rate policer. The default value is "Disabled". Configure the CIR for the port policer. The default value is "unlimited". Valid values are in the range 16 to 1000000.
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-4-22 Egress Queue Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Queue ID Rate Limit (Kbps)
Description Display the current queue ID. Display the current rate limit.
235
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.5 Storm Control
Storm control for the switch is configured on this Page. There is an unknown unicast storm rate control, unknown multicast storm rate control, and a broadcast storm rate control. These only affect flooded frames, i.e. frames with a (VLAN ID, DMAC) pair not present on the MAC Address table.
4.4.5.1 Global Setting
The Storm Control Global Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-4-23 & Figure 4-4-24 appear.
Figure 4-4-23 Storm Control Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Unit
Preamble & IFG
Description Controls the unit of measure for the storm control rate as "pps" or "bps". The default value is "bps". Set the excluded or included interframe gap
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-4-24 Storm Control Global Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Unit Preamble & IFG
Description Display the current unit. Display the current preamble & IFG.
236
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.5.2 Port Setting
Storm control for the switch is configured on this page. There are three types of storm rate control: Broadcast storm rate control Unknown Multicast storm rate control Unknown Unicast storm rate control
The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unknown unicast, unknown multicast, or broadcast traffic across the switch. The Storm Control Configuration screens in Figure 4-4-25 & Figure 4-4-26 appear.
Figure 4-4-25 Storm Control Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Port State Action Type Enable
Rate (kbps/pps)
Description Select port for this drop down list.
Enable or disable the storm control status for the given storm type.
Configures the action performed when storm control is over rate on a port. Valid values are Shutdown or Drop. The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here:
Broadcast Unknown Multicast Unknown Unicast Configure the rate for the storm control. The default value is "10,000".
Buttons : Click to apply changes
237
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-4-26 Storm Control Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Port State Broadcast (Kbps/pps) Unknown Multicast (Kbps/pps) Unknown Unicast (Kbps/pps) Action
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current port state. Display the current broadcast storm control rate. Display the current unknown multicast storm control rate. Display the current unknown unicast storm control rate. Display the current action.
238
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.6 Voice VLAN 4.4.6.1 Introduction to Voice VLAN
Configure the switch port rate limit for the switch port on this page. Voice VLAN is specially configured for the user voice data traffic. By setting a Voice VLAN and adding the ports of the connected voice equipments to Voice VLAN, the user will be able to configure QoS (Quality of service) service for voice data, and improve voice data traffic transmission priority to ensure the calling quality. The switch can judge if the data traffic is the voice data traffic from specified equipment according to the source MAC address field of the data packet entering the port. The packet with the source MAC address complying with the system defined voice equipment OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) will be considered the voice data traffic and transmitted to the Voice VLAN. The configuration is based on MAC address, acquiring a mechanism in which every voice equipment transmitting information through the network has got its unique MAC address. VLAN will trace the address belongs to specified MAC. By This means, VLAN allows the voice equipment always belong to Voice VLAN when relocated physically. The greatest advantage of the VLAN is the equipment can be automatically placed into Voice VLAN according to its voice traffic which will be transmitted at specified priority. Meanwhile, when voice equipment is physically relocated, it still belongs to the Voice VLAN without any further configuration modification, which is because it is based on voice equipment other than switch port.
The Voice VLAN feature enables the voice traffic to forward on the Voice VLAN, and then the switch can be classified and scheduled to network traffic. It is recommended there are two VLANs on a port -- one for voice, one for data.
Before connecting the IP device to the switch, the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly. It should be configured through its own GUI.
239
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.6.2 Properties
The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic to forward on the Voice VLAN, and then the switch can be classified and scheduled to network traffic. It is recommended that there are two VLANs on a port -- one for voice, one for data. Before connecting the IP device to the switch, the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly. It should be configured through its own GUI. This page provides to select the ingress bandwidth preamble. The Ingress Bandwidth Control Setting/Status screen in Figure 4-4-27 & Figure 4-4-28 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-4-27 Properites Page Screenshot
Object Voice VLAN State
Voice VLAN ID Remark CoS/802.1p
Description Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation. We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN. It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN mode operation. Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN mode operation Indicates the Voice VLAN ID. It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID. It is conflict configuration if the value equal management VID, MVR VID, PVID, etc. The allowed range is 1 to 4095. Select 802.1p value for this drop down list.
1p remark
Enable or disable 802.1p remark.
Aging Time (30-65536 min)
The time after which a port is removed from the Voice VLAN when VoIP traffic is no longer received on the port. (\Default: 1440 minutes).
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
240
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-4-28 Properites Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Voice VLAN State Voice VLAN ID Remark CoS/802.1p 1p remark Aging
Description Display the current voice VLAN state. Display the current voice VLAN ID. Display the current remark CoS/802.1p. Display the current 1p remark. Display the current aging time.
241
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.6.3 Telephony OUI MAC Setting
Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this Page. The Telephony OUI MAC Setting screens in Figure 4-4-29 & Figure 4-4-30 appear.
Figure 4-4-29 Voice VLAN OUI Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object OUI Address
Description Buttons
Description A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE. It must be 6 characters long and the input format is "xx:xx:xx" (x is a hexadecimal digit). User-defined text that identifies the VoIP devices
: Click to add voice VLAN OUI setting.
Figure 4-4-30 Voice VLAN OUI Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object OUI Address Description Modify
Description Display the current OUI address. Display the current description.
Click
to edit voice VLAN OUI group parameter.
Click
to delete voice VLAN OUI group parameter.
242
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.4.6.4 Telephony OUI Port Setting
The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN, then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic. It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port - one for voice, one for data. Before connecting the IP device to the switch, the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly. It should be configured through its own GUI. The Telephony OUI MAC Setting screens in Figure 4-4-31 & Figure 4-4-32 appear.
Figure 4-4-31 Voice VLAN Port Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port State CoS Mode
Description Select port number for this drop down list. Enable or disable the voice VLAN port setting. The default value is "Disabled". Select the current CoS mode.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
243
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-4-32 Voice VLAN Port State Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port State CoS Mode
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current state. Display the current CoS mode.
244
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5 Security
This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch, including the user access and management control. The Security Page contains links to the following main topics:
Access Security AAA 802.1x Port Security DHCP Snooping Dynamic ARP Inspection IP Source Guard DoS Access Control List
4.5.1 Access Security
This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch, including the different access methods Telnet, SSH, HTTP and HTTPs.
4.5.1.1 Telnet
The Telnet Settings and Information screen in Figure 4-5-1 & Figure 4-5-2 appear.
Figure 4-5-1 Telnet Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Telnet Service
Description Disable or enable telnet service.
Login Authentication List Select login authentication list for this drop down list.
Enable Authentication List Select enable authentication list for this drop down list.
245
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Session Timeout Password Retry Count Silent Time
Set the session timeout value. Set the password retry count value. Set the silent time value.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes
: Click to disconnect telnet communication
Figure 4-5-2 Telnet Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Telnet Service Login Authentication List Enable Authentication List Session Timeout Password Retry Count Silent Time Current Telnet Session Count
Description Display the current Telnet service. Display the current login authentication list. Display the current enable authentication list. Display the current session timeout. Display the current password retry count. Display the current silent time. Display the current telnet session count
246
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.1.2 SSH
Configure SSH on this Page. This Page shows the Port Security status. Port Security is a module with no direct configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules. When a user module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set-up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise. The SSH Settings and Information screens in Figure 4-5-3 & Figure 4-5-4 appear.
Figure 4-5-3 SSH Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object SSH Service Login Authentication List Enable Authentication List Session Timeout Password Retry Count Silent Time
Description Disable or enable SSH service. Select login authentication list for this drop down list. Select enable authentication list for this drop down list. Set the session timeout value. Set the password retry count value. Set the silent time value.
Buttons : Click to apply changes. : Click to disconnect telnet communication.
247
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-5-4 SSH Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object SSH Service
Description Display the current SSH service.
Login Authentication List Display the current login authentication list.
Enable Authentication List Display the current enable authentication list.
Session Timeout
Display the current session timeout.
Password Retry Count
Display the current password retry count.
Silent Time
Display the current silent time.
Current SSH Session Count Display the current SSH session count.
248
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.1.3 HTTP
The HTTP Settings and Information screens in Figure 4-5-5 & Figure 4-5-6 appear.
Figure 4-5-5 HTTP Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object HTTP Service
Description Disable or enable HTTP service
Login Authentication List Select login authentication list for this drop down list
Session Timeout
Set the session timeout value
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-6 HTTP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object
Description
HTTP Service
Display the current HTTP service.
Login Authentication List Display the current login authentication list.
Session Timeout
Display the current session timeout.
249
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.1.4 HTTPs
The HTTPs Settings and Information screen in Figure 4-5-7 & Figure 4-5-8 appear.
Figure 4-5-7 HTTPs Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object HTTPs Service Automatic Redirect Login Authentication List Session Timeout
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Description Disable or enable HTTPs service. Disable or enable automatic redirect service. Select login authentication list for this drop down list. Set the session timeout value.
Figure 4-5-8 HTTPs Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object HTTPs Service
Description Display the current HTTPs service.
Automatic Redirect
Disable the automatic redirect service.
Login Authentication List Display the current login authentication list.
Session Timeout
Display the current session timeout.
250
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.1.5 Access Method Profile Rules
The Access Method Profile Rules Table Setting and Table screens in Figure 4-5-9 & Figure 4-5-10 appear.
Figure 4-5-9 Profile Rule Table Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Access Profile Name
(1-32 characters) Priority (1-65535)
Description Indicates the access profile name.
Set priority The allowed value is from 1 to 65535
Management Method
Action
Port IP-Source
Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP/HTTPs/telnet/SSH/SNMP/All interface that the host IP address matched the entry. An IP address can contain any combination of permit or deny rules. (Default: Permit rules)Sets the access mode of the profile; either permit or deny. Select port for this drop down list Indicates the IP address for the access management entry
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-10 Profile Rule Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Access Profile Name Priority Management Method Action
Description Display the current access profile name. Display the current priority. Display the current management method. Display the current action.
251
Port Source IPv4 Source IPv4 Mask Source IPv6 Source IPv6 Prefix Modify
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Display the current port list. Display the current source IPv4 address. Display the current source IPv4 mask. Display the current source IPv6 address. Display the current source IPv6 prefix.
Click
to edit profile rule parameter.
Click
to delete profile rule entry.
4.5.1.6 Access Profiles
The access profile screens in Figure 4-5-11 & Figure 4-5-12 appear.
Figure 4-5-11 Access Profile Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Access Profile
Description Select access profile for this drop down list.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-12 Access Profile Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Access Profile
Delete
Description Display the current access profile.
Click
to delete access profile entry.
252
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.2 AAA
Authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) provides a framework for configuring access control on the Managed Switch. The three security functions can be summarized as follows:
Authentication -- Identifies users that request access to the network. Authorization -- Determines if users can access specific services. Accounting -- Provides reports, auditing, and billing for services that users have accessed on the network. The AAA functions require the use of configured RADIUS or TACACS+ servers in the network. The security servers can be defined as sequential groups that are then applied as a method for controlling user access to specified services. For example, when the switch attempts to authenticate a user, a request is sent to the first server in the defined group, if there is no response the second server will be tried, and so on. If at any point a pass or fail is returned, the process stops. The Managed Switch supports the following AAA features: Accounting for IEEE 802.1X authenticated users that access the network through the Managed Switch. Accounting for users that access management interfaces on the Managed Switch through the console and Telnet. Accounting for commands that users enter at specific CLI privilege levels. Authorization of users that access
management interfaces on the Managed Switch through the console and Telnet. To configure AAA on the Managed Switch, you need to follow this general process:
1. Configure RADIUS and TACACS+ server access parameters. See "Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication".
2. Define RADIUS and TACACS+ server groups to support the accounting and authorization of services. 3. Define a method name for each service to which you want to apply accounting or authorization and specify the
RADIUS or TACACS+ server groups to use. Apply the method names to port or line interfaces.
This guide assumes that RADIUS and TACACS+ servers have already been configured to support AAA. The configuration of RADIUS and TACACS+ server software is beyond the scope of this guide, refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS or TACACS+ server software.
253
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.2.1 Login List
This page is to login list parameters. The authentication list screen in Figure 4-5-13 & Figure 4-5-14 appears.
Figure 4-5-13 New Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object List Name Method 1-4
Description Defines a name for the authentication list.
Set the login authentication method: Empty /None / Local /TACACS+/RADIUS/Enable
Buttons : Click to add authentication list.
Figure 4-5-14 Login Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object List Name Method List Modify
Description Display the current list name. Display the current method list.
Click
to edit login authentication list parameter.
Click
to delete login authentication list entry.
254
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.2.2 Enable List
This page is to login list parameters. The authentication list screens in Figure 4-5-15 & Figure 4-5-16 appear.
Figure 4-5-15 New Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object List Name Method 1-3
Description Defines a name for the authentication list.
Set the login authentication method: Empty /None /Enable /TACACS+ /RADIUS.
Buttons : Click to add authentication list.
Figure 4-5-16 Login Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object List Name Method List Modify
Description Display the current list name. Display the current method list.
Click
to edit login authentication list parameter.
Click
to delete login authentication list entry.
255
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.2.3 RADIUS Server
This page is to configure the RADIUS server connection session parameters. The RADIUS Settings screens in Figure 4-5-17, Figure 4-5-18 & Figure 4-5-19 appears.
Figure 4-5-17 Use Default Parameters Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Retries Timeout for Reply Dead Time
Key String
Description Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 10, to wait for a reply from a RADIUS server before retransmitting the request.
Retransmit is the number of times, in the range 1 to 30, a RADIUS request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding. If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead.
The Dead Time, which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds, is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead.
Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if more than one server has been configured.
The secret key - up to 63 characters long - shared between the RADIUS server and the switch.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
256
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-5-18 New Radius Server Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Server Definition Server IP Authentication Port Acct Port Key String Timeout for Reply
Retries
Description Set the server definition. Address of the Radius server IP/name. The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server. If the port is set to 0 (zero), the default port (1812) is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server. The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server. If the port is set to 0 (zero), the default port (1813) is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server. The shared key - shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch. The Timeout, which can be set to a number between 1 and 30 seconds, is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server. If the server does not reply within this timeframe, we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server (if any).
RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol, which is unreliable by design. In order to cope with lost frames, the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length. If a reply is not received within the subinterval, the request is transmitted again. This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead. Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 10, to wait for a reply from a RADIUS server before retransmitting the request.
257
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Server Priority Dead Time
Usage Type
Set the server priority The Dead Time, which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds, is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead. Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if more than one server has been configured. Set the usage type. The following modes are available:
Login 802.1X All
Buttons : Click to add Radius server setting.
Figure 4-5-19 Login Authentication List Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object IP Address Auth Port Acct Port Key Timeout Retries Priority Dead Time Usage Type Modify
Description Display the current IP address. Display the current auth port. Display the current acct port. Display the current key. Display the current timeout. Display the current retry times. Display the current priority. Display the current dead time. Display the current usage type.
Click
to edit login authentication list parameter.
Click
to delete login authentication list entry.
258
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.2.4 TACACS+ Server
This page is to configure the RADIUS server connection session parameters. The RADIUS Settings screens in Figure 4-5-20, Figure 4-5-21 & Figure 4-5-22 appear.
Figure 4-5-20 Use Default Parameters Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Key String
Timeout for Reply
Description The secret key - up to 63 characters long - shared between the TACACS+ server and the switch. Retransmit is the number of times, in the range 1 to 30, a TACACS+ request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding. If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-21 New TACACS+ Server Page Screenshot 259
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object Server Definition Server IP Server Port
Server Key Server Timeout
Server Priority
Description Set the server definition.
Address of the TACACS+ server IP/name.
Network (TCP) port of TACACS+ server used for authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 49). The key- shared between the TACACS+ Authentication Server and the switch.
The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the server before it resends the request. Set the server priority.
Buttons : Click to add Radius server setting.
Figure 4-5-22 TACACS+ Servers Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object IP Address Port Key Timeout Priority Modify
Description Display the current IP address. Display the current port. Display the current key. Display the current timeout. Display the current priority
Click
to edit login authentication list parameter
Click
to delete login authentication list entry
260
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.3 802.1X
Overview of 802.1X (Port-based) Authentication
In the 802.1X-world, the user is called the supplicant, the switch is the authenticator, and the RADIUS server is the authentication server. The switch acts as the man-in-the-middle, forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server. Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802.1X frames, known as EAPOL (EAP over LANs) frames. EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs (RFC3748). Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets. RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch's IP address, name, and the supplicant's port number on the switch. EAP is very flexible, in that it allows for different authentication methods, like MD5-Challenge, PEAP, and TLS. The important thing is that the authenticator (the switch) doesn't need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using, or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method. The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type (EAPOL or RADIUS) and forwards it.
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication. Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant, the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant.
Overview of User Authentication It is allowed to configure the Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods, such as telnet and Web browser. This Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options:
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+) Local user name and Privilege Level control
4.5.3.1 Understanding IEEE 802.1X Port-based Authentication
The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a client-server-based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports. The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN.
Until the client is authenticated, 802.1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic through the port to which the client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic can pass through the port.
This section includes this conceptual information: Device Roles Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States
261
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C Device Roles With 802.1X port-based authentication, the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below.
Figure 4-5-23 Client--the device (workstation) that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from
the switch. The workstation must be running 802.1X-compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system. (The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802.1X specification.) Authentication server--performs the actual authentication of the client. The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services. Because the switch acts as the proxy, the authentication service is transparent to the client. In this release, the Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) extensions is the only supported authentication server; it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3.0. RADIUS operates in a client/server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients. Switch (802.1X device)--controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client. The switch acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the client and the authentication server, requesting identity information from the client, verifying that information with the authentication server, and relaying a response to the client. The switch includes the RADIUS client, which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) frames and interacting with the authentication server. When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server, the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re-encapsulated in the RADIUS format. The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation, and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format. When the switch receives frames from the authentication server, the server's frame header is removed, leaving the EAP frame, which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client.
262
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication. If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port-control auto interface configuration command, the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up. It then sends an EAP-request/identity frame to the client to request its identity (typically, the switch sends an initial identity/request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information). Upon receipt of the frame, the client responds with an EAP-response/identity frame. However, if during bootup, the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame from the switch, the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL-start frame, which prompts the switch to request the client's identity
If 802.1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device, any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped. If the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame after three attempts to start authentication, the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state. A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated. When the client supplies its identity, the switch begins its role as the intermediary, passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails. If the authentication succeeds, the switch port becomes authorized. The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used. "Figure 4-5-24" shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One-Time-Password (OTP) authentication method with a RADIUS server.
Figure 4-5-24 EAP Message Exchange
263
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network. The port starts in the unauthorized state. While in this state, the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802.1X protocol packets. When a client is successfully authenticated, the port transitions to the authorized state, allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally. If a client that does not support 802.1X is connected to an unauthorized 802.1X port, the switch requests the client's identity. In this situation, the client does not respond to the request, the port remains in the unauthorized state, and the client is not granted access to the network. In contrast, when an 802.1X-enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802.1X protocol, the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL-start frame. When no response is received, the client sends the request for a fixed number of times. Because no response is received, the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated (receives an Accept frame from the authentication server), the port state changes to authorized, and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port. If the authentication fails, the port remains in the unauthorized state, but authentication can be retried. If the authentication server cannot be reached, the switch can retransmit the request. If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts, authentication fails, and network access is not granted. When a client logs off, it sends an EAPOL-logoff message, causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state. If the link state of a port transitions from up to down, or if an EAPOL-logoff frame is received, the port returns to the unauthorized state.
264
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.3.2 802.1X Setting
This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802.1X authentication system.
The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a port-based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication. One or more central servers, the backend servers, determine whether the user is allowed access to the network. These backend (RADIUS) servers are configured on the "Security802.1X Access Control802.1X Setting" page. The IEEE802.1X standard defines port-based operation, but non-standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below.
The 802.1X Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-5-25 & Figure 4-5-26 appear.
Figure 4-5-25 802.1X Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object 802.1X
Description Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally disabled, all ports are allowed forwarding of frames.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-26 802.1X Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object 802.1X
Description Display the current 802.1X state.
265
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.3.3 802.1X Port Setting
This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802.1X Port Setting. The 802.1X Port Setting screens in Figure 4-5-27 & Figure 4-5-28 appear.
Figure 4-5-27 802.1X Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Mode
Reauthentication Enable
Description Select port for this drop down list.
If NAS is globally enabled, this selection controls the port's authentication mode. The following modes are available:
No Authentication Authentication Force Authorized
In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up, and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication. Force Unauthorized In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up, and any client on the port will be disallowed network access.
If checked, successfully authenticated supplicants/clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period. Reauthentication for 802.1X-enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached.
266
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Reauthentication Period
Quiet Period Supplicant Period Maximum Request
Retries
Determines the period, in seconds, after which a connected client must be reauthenticated. This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked. Valid values are in the range 30 to 65535 seconds.
Sets time to keep silent on supplicant authentication failure.
Sets the interval for the supplicant to re-transmit EAP request/identify frame.
The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting. The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-28 802.1X Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object
Description
Port
The switch port number of the logical port.
Mode (pps)
Display the current mode.
Status (pps)
Display the current status.
Periodic Reauthentication Display the current periodic reauthentication.
Reauthentication Period Quiet Period
Display the current reauthentication period. Display the current quiet period.
Supplicant Timeout
Display the current supplicant timeout.
Max. EAP Requests
Display the current Max. EAP requests.
Modify
Click
to edit 802.1X port setting parameter.
267
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.3.4 Guest VLAN Setting
Overview When a Guest VLAN enabled port's link comes up, the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames. If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max. Reauth. Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meantime, the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN. The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout. If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled, the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN. If disabled, the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port (this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port's Admin State is changed), and if not, the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN. Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN, but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout.
Once in the Guest VLAN, the port is considered authenticated, and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN. The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN.
While in the Guest VLAN, the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames, and if one such frame is received, the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode. If an EAPOL frame is received, the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the "Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen" is disabled. The 802.1X Guest VLAN setting screens in Figure 4-5-29 & Figure 4-5-30 appear.
Figure 4-5-29 Guest VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Guest VLAN ID
Description This is the value that a port's Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN. It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
Guest VLAN Enabled
Valid values are in the range [1~4094]. A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN - typically with limited network access - on which 802.1X-unaware clients are placed after a network administrator-defined timeout. The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below.
268
Guest VLAN Port Setting
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The "Guest VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable Guest VLAN functionality.
When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN.
When unchecked, the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports.
When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a given port, the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below. This option is only available for EAPOL-based modes, i.e.: · Port-based 802.1X
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-30 Guest VLAN Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Name Enable State In Guest VLAN
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current state. Display the current guest VLAN.
269
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.3.5 Authenticated Host
The Authenticated Host Table screen in Figure 4-5-31 appears.
Figure 4-5-31 Authenticated Host Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object
Description
User Name
Display the current user name.
Port
Display the current port number.
Session Time
Display the current session time.
Authentication Method Display the current authentication method.
MAC Address
Display the current MAC address.
270
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.4 Port Security
This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings. Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port. A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID. If Limit Control is enabled on a port, the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port. If this number is exceeded, an action is taken. The action can be one of four different as described below.
The Limit Control module is one of the modules that utilize a lower-layer module while the Port Security module manages MAC addresses learned on the port.
The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections, a system- and a port-wid. The IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry and Table Status screens in Figure 4-5-32 & Figure 4-5-33 appear.
Figure 4-5-32 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Security Mac L2 Entry
Action
Description Select port for this drop down list.
Enable or disable the port security.
The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port. If the limit is exceeded, the corresponding action is taken.
The switch is "born" with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security-enabled port. Since all ports draw from the same pool, it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted, if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses.
If Limit is reached, the switch can take one of the following actions: Forward: Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port, but take
no further action. Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, shut down the
port. This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port, and no new will be learned. Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port (by disconnecting the cable), the port will
271
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
remain shut down. There are three ways to re-open the port: 1) Disable and re-enable Limit Control on the port or the switch, 2) Click the Reopen button. Discard: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, it will trigger the action that do not learn the new MAC and drop the package.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-33 Port Security Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Name
Enable State L2 Entry Num Action
Description The switch port number of the logical port.
Display the current per port security status. Display the current L2 entry number. Display the current action.
272
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.5 DHCP Snooping 4.5.5.1 DHCP Snooping Overview
The addresses assigned to DHCP clients on unsecure ports can be carefully controlled using the dynamic bindings registered with DHCP Snooping. DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or other devices which send port-related information to a DHCP server. This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port.
Command Usage Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received from an outside source. DHCP snooping is
used to filter DHCP messages received on a non-secure interface from outside the network or firewall. When DHCP snooping is enabled globally and enabled on a VLAN interface, DHCP messages received on an untrusted interface from a device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be dropped. Table entries are only learned for trusted interfaces. An entry is added or removed dynamically to the DHCP snooping table when a client receives or releases an IP address from a DHCP server. Each entry includes a MAC address, IP address, lease time, VLAN identifier, and port identifier. When DHCP snooping is enabled, DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping.
273
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C Filtering rules are implemented as follows:
If the global DHCP snooping is disabled, all DHCP packets are forwarded. If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received, all DHCP
packets are forwarded for a trusted port. If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message, a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also added to the binding table. If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received, but the port is not trusted, it is processed as follows:
If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server (including OFFER, ACK or NAK messages), the packet is dropped.
If the DHCP packet is from a client, such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message, the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table.
If the DHCP packet is from a client, such as a DISCOVER, REQUEST, INFORM, DECLINE or RELEASE message, the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled. However, if MAC address verification is enabled, then the packet will only be forwarded if the client's hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header.
If the DHCP packet is not a recognizable type, it is dropped. If a DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above, it will only be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN. If a DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port, it will be forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the
same VLAN. If the DHCP snooping is globally disabled, all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table.
Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port(s) through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted. Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it receives an ACK message from a DHCP server. Also, when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself, no filtering takes place. However, when the switch receives any messages from a DHCP server, any packets received from untrusted ports are dropped.
274
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.5.2 Global Setting
DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of switch when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server. Configure DHCP Snooping on this page. The DHCP Snooping Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-5-34 & Figure 4-5-35 appear.
Figure 4-5-34 DHCP Snooping Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object DHCP Snooping
Description Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable DHCP snooping mode operation. When enable DHCP snooping mode operation, the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports.
Disabled: Disable DHCP snooping mode operation.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-35 DHCP Snooping Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object DHCP Snooping
Description Display the current DHCP snooping status.
275
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.5.3 VLAN Setting
Command Usage When DHCP snooping is enabled globally on the switch, and enabled on the specified VLAN, DHCP packet filtering will be
performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN.
When the DHCP snooping is globally disabled, DHCP snooping can still be configured for specific VLANs, but the changes will not take effect until DHCP snooping is globally re-enabled.
When DHCP snooping is globally enabled, and DHCP snooping is then disabled on a VLAN, all dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table.
The DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting screens in Figure 4-5-36 & Figure 4-5-37 appear.
Figure 4-5-36 DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN List Status
Description Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN. Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable DHCP snooping mode operation. When enable DHCP snooping mode operation, the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports.
Disabled: Disable DHCP snooping mode operation.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-37 DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN List Status
Description Display the current VLAN list. Display the current DHCP snooping status.
276
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.5.4 Port Setting
Configures switch ports as trusted or untrusted. Command Usage A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network. An untrusted interface
is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall. When DHCP snooping enabled both globally and on a VLAN, DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports
within the VLAN. When an untrusted port is changed to a trusted port, all the dynamic DHCP snooping bindings associated with this port are
removed. Set all ports connected to DHCP servers within the local network or firewall to trusted state. Set all other ports outside the
local network or firewall to untrusted state.
The DHCP Snooping Port Setting screen in Figure 4-5-38 & Figure 4-5-39 appears.
Figure 4-5-38 DHCP Snooping Port Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Type
Chaddr Check Buttons
Description Select port for this drop down list.
Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode. Possible port modes are: Trusted: Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message. Untrusted: Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message.
Indicates that the Chaddr check function is enabled on selected port. Chaddr: Client hardware address.
: Click to apply changes.
277
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-5-39 DHCP Snooping Port Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Type Chaddr Check
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current type. Display the current chaddr check.
278
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.5.5 Statistics
The DHCP Snooping Statistics screen in Figure 4-5-40 appears.
Figure 4-5-40 DHCP Snooping Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Forwarded Chaddr Check Dropped Untrust Port Dropped Untrust Port with Option82 Dropped Invalid Dropped
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current forwarded. Display the chaddr check dropped. Display untrust port dropped. Display untrust port with option82 dropped. Display invalid dropped.
Buttons : Click to clear the statistics. : Click to refresh the statistics.
279
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.5.6 Database Agent
Overview of the DHCP Snooping Database Agent When DHCP snooping is enabled, the switch uses the DHCP snooping binding database to store information about untrusted interfaces. The database can have up to 8192 bindings. Each database entry (binding) has an IP address, an associated MAC address, the lease time (in hexadecimal format), the interface to which the binding applies, and the VLAN to which the interface belongs. A checksum value, the end of each entry, is the number of bytes from the start of the file to end of the entry. Each entry is 72 bytes, followed by a space and then the checksum value. To keep the bindings when the switch reloads, you must use the DHCP snooping database agent. If the agent is disabled, dynamic ARP or IP source guard is enabled, and the DHCP snooping binding database has dynamic bindings, the switch loses its connectivity. If the agent is disabled and only DHCP snooping is enabled, the switch does not lose its connectivity, but DHCP snooping might not prevent DCHP spoofing attacks. The database agent stores the bindings in a file at a configured location. When reloading, the switch reads the binding file to build the DHCP snooping binding database. The switch keeps the file current by updating it when the database changes. When a switch learns of new bindings or when it loses bindings, the switch immediately updates the entries in the database. The switch also updates the entries in the binding file. The frequency at which the file is updated is based on a configurable delay, and the updates are batched. If the file is not updated in a specified time (set by the write-delay and abort-timeout values), the update stops. The DHCP Snooping Database and Information screens in Figure 4-5-41 & Figure 4-5-42 appear.
Figure 4-5-41 DHCP Snooping Database Setting Page Screenshot
280
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object Database Type File Name Remote Server Write Delay
Timeout
Description Select database type.
The name of file image.
Fill in your remote server IP address.
Specify the duration for which the transfer should be delayed after the binding database changes. The range is from 15 to 86400 seconds. The default is 300 seconds (5 minutes). Specify when to stop the database transfer process after the binding database changes. The range is from 0 to 86400. Use 0 for an infinite duration. The default is 300 seconds (5 minutes).
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-42 DHCP Snooping Database Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Database Type File Name Remote Server Write Delay Timeout
Description Display the current database type. Display the current file name. Display the current remote server. Display the current write delay. Display the current timeout.
281
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.5.7 Rate Limit
After enabling DHCP snooping, the switch will monitor all the DHCP messages and implement software transmission. The DHCP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4-5-43 & Figure 4-5-44 appear.
Figure 4-5-43 DHCP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port State Rate Limit (pps)
Buttons
Description Select port for this drop down list. Set default or user-define. Configure the rate limit for the port policer. The default value is "unlimited". Valid values are in the range 1 to 300.
: Click to apply changes
Figure 4-5-44 DHCP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Name Rate Limit (pps)
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current rate limit.
282
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.5.8 Option82 Global Setting
DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch and its DHCP clients to DHCP servers. Known as DHCP Option 82, it allows compatible DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP addresses, or to set other services or policies for clients. It is also an effective tool in preventing malicious network attacks from attached clients on DHCP services, such as IP Spoofing, Client Identifier Spoofing, MAC Address Spoofing, and Address Exhaustion.
The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client. The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies. Specifically the option works by setting two sub-options:
Circuit ID (option 1) Remote ID (option2).
The Circuit ID sub-option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on. The Remote ID sub-option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit.
The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is "vlan_id" "module_id" "port_no". The parameter of "vlan_id" is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID. The parameter of "module_id" is the third byte for the module ID (in standalone switch it always equal 0, in switch it means switch ID). The parameter of "port_no" is the fourth byte and it means the port number.
After enabling DHCP snooping, the switch will monitor all the DHCP messages and implement software transmission. The DHCP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4-5-45 & Figure 4-5-46 appear.
Figure 4-5-45 Option82 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object State
Description Set the option2 (remote ID option) content of option 82 added by DHCP request packets. Default means the default VLAN MAC format. User-Define means the remote-id content of option 82 specified by users
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
283
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-5-46 Option82 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Option82 Remote ID
Description Display the current option82 remote ID.
4.5.5.9 Option82 Port Setting
This function is used to set the retransmitting policy of the system for the received DHCP request message which contains option82.
The drop mode means that if the message has option82, then the system will drop it without processing. The keep mode means that the system will keep the original option82 segment in the message, and forward it to
the server to process The replace mode means that the system will replace the option 82 segment in the existing message with its own
option 82, and forward the message to the server to process. Option82 Port Setting screens in Figure 4-5-47 & Figure 4-5-48 appear.
Figure 4-5-47 Option82 Global Setting Page Screenshot
284
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Enable Allow Untrusted
Buttons
Description Select port for this drop down list. Enable or disable option82 function on port. Select modes for this drop down list. The following modes are available:
Drop Keep Replace
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-48 Option82 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Enable Allow Untrusted
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current status. Display the current untrusted mode.
285
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.5.10 Option82 Circuit-ID Setting
Set creation method for option82, users can define the parameters of circuit-id suboption by themselves. Option82 Circuit-ID Setting screens in Figure 4-5-49 & Figure 4-5-50 appear.
Figure 4-5-49 Option82 Port Circuit-ID Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port
VLAN Circuit ID
Description Select port for this drop down list.
Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN. Set the option1 (Circuit ID) content of option 82 added by DHCP request packets.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-50 Option82 Port Circuit-ID Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port VLAN Circuit ID
Description Display the current port. Display the current VLAN. Display the current circuit ID.
286
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.6 Dynamic ARP Inspection
Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI) is a secure feature. Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by "poisoning" the ARP caches. This feature is used to block such attacks. Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT. This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration.
A Dynamic ARP prevents the untrust ARP packets based on the DHCP Snooping Database.
4.5.6.1 Global Setting
DAI Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-5-51 & Figure 4-5-52 appear.
Figure 4-5-51 DAI Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object DAI
Description Enable the Global Dynamic ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-52 DAI Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object DAI
Description Display the current DAI status.
287
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.6.2 VLAN Setting
DAI VLAN Setting screens in Figure 4-5-53 & Figure 4-5-54 appear.
Figure 4-5-53 DAI VLAN Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN ID Status
Description Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN.
Enables Dynamic ARP Inspection on the specified VLAN. Options:
Enable Disable
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-54 DAI VLAN Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object VLAN List Status
Description Display the current VLAN list. Display the current status.
288
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.6.3 Port Setting
Configures switch ports as DAI trusted or untrusted and check mode. DAI Port Setting screens in Figure 4-5-55 & Figure 4-5-56 appear.
Figure 4-5-55 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Type
Src-Mac Chk
Dst-Mac Chk
IP Chk IP Allow Zero
Description Select port for this drop down list.
Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port.
Default: All interfaces are untrusted. Enable or disable to checks the source MAC address in the Ethernet header against the sender MAC address in the ARP body. This check is performed on both ARP requests and responses. When enabled, packets with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped.
Enable or disable to checks the destination MAC address in the Ethernet header against the target MAC address in ARP body. This check is performed for ARP responses. When enabled, packets with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped.
Enable or disable to checks the source and destination IP addresses of ARP packets. The all-zero, all-one or multicast IP addresses are considered invalid and the corresponding packets are discarded.
Enable or disable to checks all-zero IP addresses.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
289
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-5-56 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Type Src-Mac Chk Dst-Mac Chk IP Chk IP Allow Zero
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current port type. Display the current Src-Mac Chk status. Display the current Dst-Mac Chk status. Display the current IP Chk status. Display the current IP allow zero status.
290
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.6.4 Statistics
Configures switch ports as DAI trusted or untrusted and check mode. DAI Port Setting screen in Figure 4-5-57 appears.
Figure 4-5-57 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port
Description The switch port number of the logical port.
Forwarded
Display the current forwarded.
Source MAC Failures
Display the current source MAC failures.
Dest MAC Failures
Display the current source MAC failures.
SIP Validation Failures
Display the current SIP Validation failures.
DIP Validation Failures
Display the current DIP Validation failures.
IP-MAC Mismatch Failures Display the current IP-MAC mismatch failures.
Buttons : Click to clear the statistics. : Click to refresh the statistics. 291
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.6.5 ARP Rate Limit
The ARP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4-5-58 & Figure 4-5-59 appear.
Figure 4-5-58 ARP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port State Rate Limit (pps) Buttons
Description Select port for this drop down list. Set default or user-define. Configure the rate limit for the port policer. The default value is "unlimited".
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-59 ARP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Name Rate Limit (pps)
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current rate limit.
292
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.7 IP Source Guard
IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings. It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host. After receiving a packet, the port looks up the key attributes (including IP address, MAC address and VLAN tag) of the packet in the binding entries of the IP source guard. If there is a matching entry, the port will forward the packet. Otherwise, the port will abandon the packet. IP source guard filters packets based on the following types of binding entries:
IP-port binding entry MAC-port binding entry IP-MAC-port binding entry
293
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.7.1 Port Settings
IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings. It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host. The IP Source Guard Port Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-5-60 & Figure 4-5-61 appear.
Figure 4-5-60 IP Source Guard Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Status Verify Source
Max Binding Entry
Description Select port for this drop down list.
Enable or disable the IP source guard.
Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based IP address, or IP address and MAC address.
None Disables IP source guard filtering on the Managed Switch. IP Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses stored in the binding
table. IP and MAC Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses and
corresponding MAC addresses stored in the binding table. The maximum number of IP source guard that can be secured on this port. The available options are "No-Limit" and "1-50".
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
294
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-5-61 IP Source Guard Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port
Description The switch port number of the logical port.
Status
Display the current status.
Verify Source
Display the current verify source.
Max Binding Entry
Display the current max binding entry.
Current Binding Entry Display the current binding entry.
295
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.7.2 Binding Table
The IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry and Table Status screens in Figure 4-5-62 & Figure 4-5-63 appear.
Figure 4-5-62 IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address
Description Select port for this drop down list. Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN. Sourcing MAC address is allowed. Sourcing IP address is allowed.
Buttons : Click to add authentication list
Figure 4-5-63 IP Source Guard Binding Table Status Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port VLAN MAC Address IP Address Type Lease Time Action
Description Display the current port. Display the current VLAN. Display the current MAC address. Display the current IP Address. Display the current entry type. Display the current lease time.
Click
to delete IP source guard binding table status entry.
296
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.8 DoS
The DoS is short for Denial of Service, which is a simple but effective destructive attack on the internet. The server under DoS attack will drop normal user data packet due to non-stop processing the attacker's data packet, leading to the denial of the service and worse can lead to leak of sensitive data of the server. Security feature refers to applications such as protocol check which is for protecting the server from attacks such as DoS. The protocol check allows the user to drop matched packets based on specified conditions. The security features provide several simple and effective protections against Dos attacks while acting no influence on the linear forwarding performance of the switch.
4.5.8.1 Global DoS Setting
The Global DoS Setting and Information screens in Figure 4-5-64 & Figure 4-5-65 appear.
Figure 4-5-64 Global DoS Setting Page Screenshot 297
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object DMAC = SMAC Land UDP Blat TCP Blat POD IPv6 Min Fragment ICMP Fragments IPv4 Ping Max Size IPv6 Ping Max Size Ping Max Size Setting Smurf Attack TCP Min Hdr Size TCP-SYN (SPORT < 1024) Null Scan Attack X-Mas Scan Attack TCP SYN-FIN Attack TCP SYN-RST Attack TCP Fragment (Offset = 1)
Description Enable or disable DoS check mode by DMAC = SMAC. Enable or disable DoS check mode by land. Enable or disable DoS check mode by UDP blat. Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP blat. Enable or disable DoS check mode by POD. Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv6 min fragment. Enable or disable DoS check mode by ICMP fragment. Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv4 ping max size. Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv6 ping max size. Set the max size for ping. Enable or disable DoS check mode by smurf attack. Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP min hdr size. Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP-syn (sport < 1024). Enable or disable DoS check mode by null scan attack. Enable or disable DoS check mode by x-mas scan attack. Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP syn-fin attack. Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP syn-rst attack. Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP fragment (offset = 1).
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
298
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-5-65 DoS Information Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object DMAC = SMAC Land Attack UDP Blat TCP Blat POD IPv6 Min Fragment ICMP Fragments IPv4 Ping Max Size IPv6 Ping Max Size Smurf Attack TCP Min Header Length TCP-SYN (SPORT < 1024) Null Scan Attack X-Mas Scan Attack TCP SYN-FIN Attack TCP SYN-RST Attack TCP Fragment (Offset = 1)
Description Display the current DMAC = SMAC status. Display the current land attach status. Display the current UDP blat status. Display the current TCP blat status. Display the current POD status. Display the current IPv6 min fragment status. Display the current ICMP fragment status. Display the current IPv4 ping max size status. Display the current IPv6 ping max size status. Display the current smurf attack status. Display the current TCP min header length. Display the current TCP syn status. Display the current null scan attack status. Display the current x-mas scan attack status. Display the current TCP syn-fin attack status. Display the current TCP syn-rst attack status. Display the TCP fragment (offset = 1) status.
299
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.8.2 DoS Port Setting
The DoS Port Setting and Status screens in Figure 4-5-66 & Figure 4-5-67 appear.
Figure 4-5-66 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Select DoS Protection
Description Select port for this drop down list. Enable or disable per port DoS protection.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-67 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port DoS Protection
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current DoS protection.
300
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.9 Access Control List
ACL is an acronym for Access Control List. It is the list table of ACEs, containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects, such as a process or a program. Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL. The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights.
ACL implementations can be quite complex, for example, when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation. In networking, the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server, each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service. ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic, and in this context, they are similar to firewalls.
ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry. It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID. There are three ACE frame types (Ethernet Type, ARP, and IPv4) and two ACE actions (permit and deny). The ACE also contains many detailed, different parameter options that are available for individual application. The ACL page contains links to the following main topics:
MAC-Based ACL MAC-Based ACE IPv4-Based ACL IPv4-Based ACE IPv6-Based ACL IPv6-Based ACE ACL Binding
Configuration MAC-based ACL setting Add / Edit / Delete the MAC-based ACE (Access Control Entry) setting Configuration IPv4-based ACL setting Add / Edit / Delete the IPv4-based ACE (Access Control Entry) setting Configuration IPv6-based ACL setting Add / Edit / Delete the IPv6-based ACE (Access Control Entry) setting Configure the ACL parameters (ACE) of each switch port.
301
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.9.1 MAC-Based ACL
This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. MAC-based ACL screens in Figure 4-5-68 & Figure 4-5-69 appear.
Figure 4-5-68 MAC-Based ACL Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object ACL Name
Description Create a named MAC-Based ACL list
ACL Table
Figure 4-5-69 ACL Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Delete
Description Click
to delete ACL name entry
302
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.9.2 MAC-Based ACE
An ACE consists of several parameters. Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected. The MAC-based ACE screen in Figure 4-5-70 & Figure 4-5-71 appears.
Figure 4-5-70 MAC-Based ACE Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object ACL Name Sequence Action
DA MAC
Description Select ACL name for this drop down list. Set the ACL sequence. Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE. Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned. Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped. Shutdown: Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE. Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE.
303
DA MAC Value
DA MAC Mask
SA MAC
SA MAC Value
SA MAC Mask
VLAN ID 802.1p 802.1p Value 802.1p Mask Ethertype
(Range:0x0600 0xFFFF)
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Any: No DA MAC filter is specified. User Defined: If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with
this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a DA MAC value appears. When "User Defined" is selected for the DA MAC filter, you can enter a specific destination MAC address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx". A frame that hits this ACE matches this DA MAC value. Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field (SHA) settings. 0: ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the DA MAC address. 1: ARP frames where SHA is equal to the DA MAC address. Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE. Any: No SA MAC filter is specified. User Defined: If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this
ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a SA MAC value appears. When "User Defined" is selected for the SA MAC filter, you can enter a specific source MAC address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx". A frame that hits this ACE matches this SA MAC value. Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field (SHA) settings. 0: ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SA MAC address. 1: ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SA MAC address. Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN.
Include or exclude the 802.1p value. Set the 802.1p value 0: where frame is not equal to the 802.1p value. 1: where frame is equal to the 802.1p value. You can enter a specific EtherType value. The allowed range is 0x0600 to 0xFFFF. A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value.
Buttons : Click to add ACE list.
Figure 4-5-71 MAC-Based ACE Table Page Screenshot 304
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object ACL Name
Description Display the current ACL name.
Sequence
Display the current sequence.
Action
Display the current action.
Destination MAC Address Display the current destination MAC address.
Destination MAC Address Mask
Source MAC Address
Display the current destination MAC address mask. Display the current source MAC address.
Source MAC Address Mask Display the current source MAC address mask.
VLAN ID
Display the current VLAN ID.
802.1p
Display the current 802.1p value.
802.1p Mask
Display the current 802.1p mask.
Ethertype
Display the current Ethernet type.
Modify
Click
to edit MAC-based ACL parameter
Click
to delete MAC-based ACL entry
305
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.9.3 IPv4-Based ACL
This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. IPv4-based ACL screens in Figure 4-5-72 & Figure 4-5-73 appear.
Figure 4-5-72 IPv4-Based ACL Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object ACL Name
Description Create a named IPv4-Based ACL list.
Buttons : Click to add ACL name list.
Figure 4-5-73 ACL Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Delete
Description Click
to delete ACL name entry.
306
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.9.4 IPv4-Based ACE
An ACE consists of several parameters. Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected. The IPv4-based ACE screens in Figure 4-5-74 & Figure 4-5-75 appear.
Figure 4-5-74 IP-Based ACE Page Screenshot 307
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object ACL Name
Description Select ACL name for this drop down list.
Sequence
Set the ACL sequence.
Action
Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE. Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned. Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped. Shutdown: Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE..
Protocol
Specify the protocol filter for this ACE. Any(IP): No protocol filter is specified. Select from list: If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE, choose
this value and select protocol for this drop down list.
Source IP Address
Specify the Source IP address filter for this ACE. Any: No source IP address filter is specified. User Defined: If you want to filter a specific source IP address with this ACE,
choose this value. A field for entering a source IP address value appears.
Source IP Address
When "User Defined" is selected for the source IP address filter, you can enter a
Value
specific source IP address. The legal format is "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx". A frame that
hits this ACE matches this source IP address value.
Source IP Wildcard
When "User Defined" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific
Mask
SIP mask in dotted decimal notation.
Destination IP Address
Specify the Destination IP address filter for this ACE. Any: No destination IP address filter is specified. User Defined: If you want to filter a specific destination IP address with this
ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a source IP address value
appears.
Destination IP Address When "User Defined" is selected for the destination IP address filter, you can
Value
enter a specific destination IP address. The legal format is "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx". A
frame that hits this ACE matches this destination IP address value.
Destination IP
When "User Defined" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a
Wildcard Mask
specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation.
Source Port
Specify the source port for this ACE. Any: No specifc source port is specified (source port status is "don't-care"). Single: If you want to filter a specific source port with this ACE, you can
enter a specific source port value. A field for entering a source port value
appears. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE
matches this source port value. Range: If you want to filter a specific source port range filter with this ACE,
308
Destination Port TCP Flags
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
you can enter a specific source port range value. A field for entering a source
port value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this
ACE matches this source port value.
Specify the destination port for this ACE. Any: No specifc destination port is specified (destination port status is
"don't-care"). Single: If you want to filter a specific destination port with this ACE, you can
enter a specific destination port value. A field for entering a destination port
value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE
matches this destination port value. Range: If you want to filter a specific destination port range filter with this
ACE, you can enter a specific destination port range value. A field for
entering a destination port value appears.
UGR Specify the TCP "Urgent Pointer field significant" (URG) value for this
ACE. Set: TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match
this entry. Unset: TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to
match this entry. Don't Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
ACK Specify the TCP "Acknowledgment field significant" (ACK) value for this
ACE. Set: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match
this entry. Unset: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to
match this entry. Don't Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
PSH
Specify the TCP "Push Function" (PSH) value for this ACE. Set: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match
this entry. Unset: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to
RST
match this entry. Don't Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care"). Specify the TCP "Reset the connection" (RST) value for this ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match
this entry. Unset: TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to
match this entry. Don't Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
SYN Specify the TCP "Synchronize sequence numbers" (SYN) value for this
309
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Type of Service
ICMP ICMP Code Buttons : Click to add ACE list.
ACE. Set: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match
this entry. Unset: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to
match this entry. Don't Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
FIN
Specify the TCP "No more data from sender" (FIN) value for this ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match
this entry. Unset: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to
match this entry. Don't Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the type pf service for this ACE. Any: No specifc type of service is specified (destination port status is
"don't-care"). DSCP: If you want to filter a specific DSCP with this ACE, you can enter a
specific DSCP value. A field for entering a DSCP value appears. The allowed
range is 0 to 63. A frame that hits this ACE matches this DSCP value. IP Recedence: If you want to filter a specific IP recedence with this ACE, you
can enter a specific IP recedence value. A field for entering an IP recedence
value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 7. A frame that hits this ACE
matches this IP recedence value.
Specify the ICMP for this ACE. Any: No specifc ICMP is specified (destination port status is "don't-care"). List: If you want to filter a specific list with this ACE, you can select a specific
list value. Protocol ID: If you want to filter a specific protocol ID filter with this ACE, you
can enter a specific protocol ID value. A field for entering a protocol ID value
appears. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches
this protocol ID value.
Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE. Any: No ICMP code filter is specified (ICMP code filter status is
"don't-care"). User Defined: If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this
ACE, you can enter a specific ICMP code value. A field for entering an
ICMP code value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that
hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value.
310
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-5-75 IPv4-Based ACE Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object
Description
ACL Name
Display the current ACL name.
Sequence
Display the current sequence.
Action
Display the current action.
Protocol
Display the current protocol.
Source IP Address
Display the current source IP address.
Source IP Address
Display the current source IP address wildcard mask.
Wildcard Mask
Destination IP Address Display the current destination IP address.
Destination IP Address Display the current destination IP address wildcard mask.
Wildcard Mask
Source Port Range
Display the current source port range.
Destination Port Range
Flag Set
Display the current destination port range. Display the current flag set.
DSCP IP Precedence ICMP Type
Display the current DSCP. Display the current IP precedence. Display the current ICMP Type.
ICMP Code Modify
Display the current ICMP code.
Click
to edit IPv4-based ACL parameter
Click
to delete IPv4-based ACL entry
311
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.9.5 IPv6-Based ACL
This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. IPv6-based ACL screens in Figure 4-5-76 & Figure 4-5-77 appear.
Figure 4-5-76 IPv6-Based ACL Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object ACL Name
Description Create a named IPv6-Based ACL list
Buttons : Click to add ACL name list.
Figure 4-5-77 ACL Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object ACL Name
Description Click
to delete ACL name entry.
312
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.9.6 IPv6-based ACE
An ACE consists of several parameters. Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected. The IPv6-based ACE screens in Figure 4-5-78 & Figure 4-5-79 appear.
Figure 4-5-78 IP-Based ACE Page Screenshot 313
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object ACL Name
Description Select ACL name for this drop down list.
Sequence
Set the ACL sequence.
Action
Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE. Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned. Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped. Shutdown: Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE.
Protocol
Specify the protocol filter for this ACE Any (IP): No protocol filter is specified. Select from list: If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE, choose
this value and select protocol for this drop down list.
Source IP Address
Specify the Source IP address filter for this ACE Any: No source IP address filter is specified. User Defined: If you want to filter a specific source IP address with this ACE,
choose this value. A field for entering a source IP address value appears.
Source IP Address
When "User Defined" is selected for the source IP address filter, you can enter a
Value
specific source IP address. The legal format is "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx". A frame that hits this ACE matches this source IP address
value.
Source IP Prefix
When "User Defined" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific
Length
SIP prefix length in dotted decimal notation.
Destination IP Address
Specify the Destination IP address filter for this ACE. Any: No destination IP address filter is specified. User Defined: If you want to filter a specific destination IP address with this
ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a source IP address value
appears.
Destination IP Address When "User Defined" is selected for the destination IP address filter, you can
Value
enter a specific destination IP address. The legal format is " xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx ". A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination IP
address value.
Destination IP Prefix When "User Defined" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a
Length
specific DIP prefix length in dotted decimal notation.
Source Port
Specify the source port for this ACE. Any: No specifc source port is specified (source port status is "don't-care"). Single: If you want to filter a specific source port with this ACE, you can
enter a specific source port value. A field for entering a source port value
appears. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE
314
Destination Port TCP Flags
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
matches this source port value. Range: If you want to filter a specific source port range filter with this ACE,
you can enter a specific source port range value. A field for entering a source
port value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this
ACE matches this source port value.
Specify the destination port for this ACE. Any: No specifc destination port is specified (destination port status is
"don't-care"). Single: If you want to filter a specific destination port with this ACE, you can
enter a specific destination port value. A field for entering a destination port
value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE
matches this destination port value. Range: If you want to filter a specific destination port range filter with this
ACE, you can enter a specific destination port range value. A field for
entering a destination port value appears.
UGR Specify the TCP "Urgent Pointer field significant" (URG) value for this
ACE. Set: TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match
this entry. Unset: TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to
match this entry. Don't Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
ACK Specify the TCP "Acknowledgment field significant" (ACK) value for this
ACE. Set: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match
this entry. Unset: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to
match this entry. Don't Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
PSH
Specify the TCP "Push Function" (PSH) value for this ACE. Set: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match
this entry. Unset: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to
match this entry. Don't Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
RST
Specify the TCP "Reset the connection" (RST) value for this ACE. Set: TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match
this entry. Unset: TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to
match this entry.
315
Type of Service ICMP ICMP Code
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Don't Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
SYN Specify the TCP "Synchronize sequence numbers" (SYN) value for this
ACE. Set: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match
this entry. Unset: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to
match this entry. Don't Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
FIN
Specify the TCP "No more data from sender" (FIN) value for this ACE.
Set: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match
this entry. Unset: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to
match this entry. Don't Care: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Specify the type pf service for this ACE. Any: No specifc type of service is specified (destination port status is
"don't-care"). DSCP: If you want to filter a specific DSCP with this ACE, you can enter a
specific DSCP value. A field for entering a DSCP value appears. The allowed
range is 0 to 63. A frame that hits this ACE matches this DSCP value. IP Recedence: If you want to filter a specific IP recedence with this ACE, you
can enter a specific IP recedence value. A field for entering an IP recedence
value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 7. A frame that hits this ACE
matches this IP recedence value.
Specify the ICMP for this ACE. Any: No specifc ICMP is specified (destination port status is "don't-care"). List: If you want to filter a specific list with this ACE, you can select a specific
list value. Protocol ID: If you want to filter a specific protocol ID filter with this ACE, you
can enter a specific protocol ID value. A field for entering a protocol ID value
appears. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches
this protocol ID value.
Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE. Any: No ICMP code filter is specified (ICMP code filter status is "don't-care"). User Defined: If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE,
you can enter a specific ICMP code value. A field for entering an ICMP code
value appears. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE
matches this ICMP code value.
316
Buttons : Click to add ACE list
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-5-79 IPv6-based ACE Table Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object ACL Name Sequence Action Protocol Source IP Address
Description Display the current ACL name. Display the current sequence. Display the current action. Display the current protocol. Display the current source IP address.
Source IP Address
Display the current source IP address wildcard mask.
Wildcard Mask
Destination IP Address Display the current destination IP address.
Destination IP Address Display the current destination IP address wildcard mask.
Wildcard Mask
Source Port Range
Display the current source port range.
Destination Port
Display the current destination port range.
Range
Flag Set
Display the current flag set.
DSCP
Display the current DSCP.
IP Precedence
Display the current IP precedence.
ICMP Type
Display the current ICMP Type.
ICMP Code
Display the current ICMP code.
Modify
Click
to edit IPv6-based ACL parameter.
Click
to delete IPv6-based ACL entry.
317
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.5.9.7 ACL Binding
This page allows you to bind the Policy content to the appropriate ACLs. The ACL Policy screens in Figure 4-5-80 & Figure 4-5-81 appears.
Figure 4-5-80 ACL Binding Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Binding Port ACL Select
Description Select port for this drop down list. Select ACL list for this drop down list.
Buttons
: Click to apply changes.
Figure 4-5-81 ACL Binding Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port MAC ACL IPv4 ACL IPv6 ACL Modify
Description The switch port number of the logical port. Display the current MAC ACL. Display the current IPv4 ACL. Display the current IPv6 ACL.
Click Click
to edit ACL binding table parameter to delete ACL binding entry
318
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.6 Ring
Use the Maintenance menu items to display and configure basic configurations of The Wall-mount Managed Switch. Under
maintenance, the following topics are provided to back up, upgrade, save and restore the configuration. This section has the
following items:
Ring Wizard
You can quickly buld an ERPS ring by wizard.
ERPS
You can configure ERPS ring in detail.
ITU-T G.8032 Ethernet Ring protection switching (ERPS) is a link layer protocol applied on Ethernet loop protection to
provide sub-50ms protection and recovery switching for Ethernet traffic in a ring topology.ERPS provides a faster redundant
recovery than Spanning Tree topology. The action is similar to STP or RSTP, but the algorithms between them are not the same.
In the Ring topology, every switch should be enabled with Ring function and two ports should be assigned as the member ports
in the ERPS. Only one switch in the Ring group would be set as the RPL owner switch that one port would be blocked, called
owner port, and PRL neighbor switch has one port that one port would be blocked, called neighbor port that connect to owner
port directly and this link is called the Ring Protection Link or RPL. Each switch will sends ETH-CCM message to check the
link status in the ring group. When the failure of network connection occurs, the nodes block the failed link and report the signal
failure message, the RPL owner switch will automatically unblocks the PRL to recover from the failure.
319
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.6.1 Ring Wizard
This page allows the user to configure the ERPS by wizard; screen in Figure 4-6-1 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-6-1 Ring Wizard page screenshot
Object All Switch Numbers
Number ID Port VLAN
Buttons
Description Set all the switch numbers for the ring group. The default number is 3 and maximum number is 30. The switch where you are requesting ERPS. Configures the port number for the MEP. Set the ERPS VLAN.
: Click to configure ERPS.
: Click to save changes.
: Click to show the ring topology.
320
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.6.2 ERPS
This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current ERPS Instance; screen in Figure 4-6-2 and Figure 4-6-3 appears.
Figure 4-6-2 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch page screenshot
Object Enable ERPS ID
Version Ring Type Port 0 Port 1
Node ID Control Vlan Revertive Guard Time
WTR Time Holdoff Time
Description Enables ERPS on the switch. ERPS must be enabled globally on the switch before it can enable on an ERPS ring. Major ring group ID for the interconnected sub-ring. It is used to send topology change updates on major ring. If ring is major, this value is same as the protection group ID of this ring. ERPS Protocol Version - v1 or v2
Type of Protecting ring.
This will create a Port 0 of the switch in the ring.
This will create "Port 1" of the switch in the Ring. As interconnected sub-ring will have only one ring port, "Port 1" is configured as "0" for interconnected sub-ring. "0" in this field indicates that no "Port 1" is associated with this instance A MAC address unique to the ring node. The MAC address must be specified in the format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx VLAN configuration of the Protection Group.
ERPS Protocol Version - v1 or v2
Guard timeout value to be used to prevent ring nodes from receiving outdated R-APS messages. The period of the guard timer can be configured in 10 ms steps between 10 ms and 2 seconds, with a default value of 500 ms Remaining WTR timeout in milliseconds.
The timing value to be used to make persistent check on Signal Fail before switching. The range of the hold off timer is 0 to 10 seconds in steps of 100 ms
321
Buttons
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C : Click to add a new Protection group entry.
: Click to refresh the page immediately.
: Click to save changes.
: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Figure 4-6-3 Ethernet Ring Protocol Switch Configuration page screenshot
PRL Configuration:
Object PRL Role PRL Port Clear
Description It can be either RPL owner or RPL Neighbor. This allows to select the east port or west port as the RPL block. If the owner has to be changed, then the clear check box allows to clear the RPL owner for that ERPS ring.
322
Instance Command: Object Command
Port
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Description Administrative command. A port can be administratively configured to be in either manual switch or forced switch state. Port selection - Port0 or Port1 of the protection Group on which the command is applied.
ERPS state:
Object Protection State Port 0
Port 1
WTR Remaining RPL Un-blocked Port 0 Block Status
Port 1 Block Status
Description ERPS state according to State Transition Tables in G.8032.
OK: State of East port is ok SF: State of East port is Signal Fail OK: State of West port is ok SF: State of West port is Signal Fail Remaining WTR timeout in milliseconds.
APS is received on the working flow.
Block status for Port 0 (Both traffic and R-APS block status). R-APS channel is never blocked on sub-rings without virtual channel. Block status for Port 1 (Both traffic and R-APS block status). R-APS channel is never blocked on sub-rings without virtual channel.
323
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.7 Power over Ethernet
The GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series can easily build a power central-controlled IP phone system, IP camera system and AP group for the enterprise. For instance, cameras / APs can be easily installed around the corner in the company for surveillance demands or build a wireless roaming environment in the office. Without the power-socket limitation, the GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series makes the installation of cameras or WLAN APs easier and more efficient. PoE Power Budget list for GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series
Model Name GS-4210-8UP2S GS-4210-16UP4C
GS-4210-24UP4C
PoE Budget 180 watts 400 watts 720 watts, operating temperature < 40 degrees C 660 watts, operating temperature between 40 to 49 degrees C 600 watts, operating temperature around 50 degrees C (Factory default mode)
The following web screen based on GS-4210-24UP4C will be the same as that of GS-4210-8UP2S and GS-4210-16UP4C, except the numbers of PoE chipset and PoE budget information.
Figure 4-7-1 Power over Ethernet Web Screen 324
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.7.1 Power over Ethernet Powered Device
3~5 watts
Voice over IP phones Enterprise can install POE VoIP Phone, ATA and other Ethernet/non-Ethernet end-devices in the central area where UPS is installed for un-interruptible power system and power control system.
6~12 watts 10~12 watts 3~60 watts
30~60 watts
Wireless LAN Access Points Museums, sightseeing spots, airports, hotels, campuses, factories, and warehouses can install the Access Point anywhere.
IP Surveillance Enterprises, museums, campuses, hospitals and banks can install IP camera without the limit of the installation location. Electrician is not needed to install AC sockets. PoE Splitter PoE Splitter splits the PoE DC over the Ethernet cable into 5/12/19/24V DC power output. It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power outlet locations, which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation time. High Power Speed Dome This state-of-the-art design is considerable to fit in various network environments like traffic centers, shopping malls, railway stations, warehouses, airports, and production facilities for the most demanding outdoor surveillance applications. Electrician is not needed to install AC sockets.
325
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.7.2 Power over Ethernet Configuration
This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE configuration setting as screen in Figure 4-7-2 appears.
Figure 4-7-2 PoE Configuration Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object System PoE Admin
Mode PoE Management Mode
Description Allows user to enable or disable PoE function. It will cause all of PoE ports to supply or not to supply power. Provide Allociation and Consumption mode option.
Temperature Threshold Power Budget
Allows setting over temperature protection threshold value. If Its system temperature is over the threshold then system will lower total PoE power budget automatically. GS-4210-8UP2S provides 180 watts PoE Budget. GS-4210-16UP4C provides 400 watts PoE Budget. GS-4210-24UP4C provides following PoE Budget options. 720 watts, operating temperature < 40 degrees C 660 watts, operating temperature between 40 to 49 degrees C 600 watts, operating temperature around 50 degrees C (Factory default mode)
This section displays the PoE Power Usage of Current Power Consumption as Figure 4-7-3 shows.
Figure 4-7-3 Current Power Consumption Screenshot
326
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings as Figure 4-7-4 shows.
Figure 4-7-4 Per Port Power over Ethernet Configuration Screenshot 327
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object PoE Mode Schedule Power Inline Mode
PD Type
Description There are three modes for PoE mode.
Enable: enable PoE function. Disable: disable PoE function. Schedule: enable PoE function in schedule mode. Indicates the scheduled profile mode. Possible profiles are: Profile1 Profile2 Profile3 Profile4
Allows user to select IEEE802.3af/802.3at/802.3bt/Ultra PoE compatibility mode. The default value is 802.3bt mode.
Indicates the power inline mode. Possible profiles are: BT: Pins 12 (pair #2 in both T568A and T568B) form one side of the DC supply and pins 36 (pair #3 in both T568A and T568B) provide the return. Pins 45 (pair #1 in both T568A and T568B) form one side of the DC supply and pins 78 (pair #4 in both T568A and T568B) provide the return End-Span: Pins 12 (pair #2 in both T568A and T568B) form one side of the DC supply and pins 36 (pair #3 in both T568A and T568B) provide the return (GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C only) Mid-Span: Pins 45 (pair #1 in both T568A and T568B) form one side of the DC supply and pins 78 (pair #4 in both T568A and T568B) provide the return (GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C only)
Provide Standard/Legacy/UPOE/Force options for PD type; the default mode is standard mode. The available options are:
Standard: This mode is IEEE 802.3bt PoE++ Type-4 or Type-3 PSE. Pins 1-2 (pair #2 in both T568A and T568B) form one side of the DC supply and pins 3-6 (pair #3 in both T568A and T568B) provide the return.Pins 4-5 (pair #1 in both T568A and T568B) form one side of the DC supply and pins 7-8 (pair #4 in both T568A and T568B) provide the return.Maximum power is 95 watts.
Legacy: In the legacy mode, the IEEE method will be tried first and if it fails to discover a valid PD, the legacy capacitance measurement with a large capacitance value will be used to detect a legacy PD. This
328
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Extended Mode Priority
PD Class
Current Used [mA] Power Used [W] Power Allocation [W]
mode is used to support legacy devices. UPOE: Set inline mode to PoH (Power over HD-BASE-T) 4-pair PoE+
PSE Pins 1-2 (pair #2 in both T568A and T568B) form one side of the DC supply and pins 3-6 (pair #3 in both T568A and T568B) provide the return.
Pins 4-5 (pair #1 in both T568A and T568B) form one side of the DC supply and pins 7-8 (pair #4 in both T568A and T568B) provide the return Maximum power is 72-60.0 watts. (GS-4210-8UP2S only) Force: The force power function will directly deliver power over UTP cable. Please be careful when using force power function and make sure the remote device is PoE powered device (PD). (GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C only)
Provide to disable or enable PoE extended mode.
The Priority represents PoE ports priority. There are three levels of power priority named Low, High and Critical.
The priority is used in case the total power consumption is over the total power budget. In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turned off, and offer power for the port of higher priority. Displays the class of the PD attached to the port, as established by the classification process. Class 0 is the default for PDs. The PD is powered based on PoE Class level if the system is working in Classification mode.
The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using.
The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using.
It can limit the port PoE supply watts. Per port maximum value must be 95 watts. Total port values must be less than the Power Reservation value. Once power overload is detected, the port will auto shut down and keep in detection mode until PD's power consumption is lower than the power limit value.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
329
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.7.3 PoE Status
This page displays to per port PoE usage status, the screen in Figure 4-7-5 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-7-5 PoE Status Screenshot
Object Port Number Watt.
Description Displays per port status. Displays per port PoE usage.
330
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.7.4 PoE Schedule
This page allows the user to define PoE schedule and scheduled power recycling. PoE Schedule Besides being used as an IP Surveillance, the Managed PoE switch is certainly applicable to construct any PoE network including VoIP and Wireless LAN. Under the trend of energy saving worldwide and contributing to the environmental protection on the Earth, the Managed PoE switch can effectively control the power supply besides its capability of giving high watts power. The "PoE schedule" function helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMB or Enterprise saving power and money.
Scheduled Power Recycling The Managed PoE switch allows each of the connected PoE IP cameras to reboot at a specified time each week. Therefore, it will reduce the chance of IP camera crash resulting from buffer overflow.
331
The screen in Figure 4-7-6 appears.
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Figure 4-7-6 PoE Schedule Screenshot Please press Add New Rule button to start setting PoE Schedule function. You have to set PoE schedule to profile and then go back to PoE Port Configuration, and select "Schedule" mode from per port "PoE Mode" option to enable you to indicate which schedule profile could be applied to the PoE port.
332
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object Profile
Week Day Start Hour Start Min End Hour End Min Reboot Enable
Reboot Only
Reboot Hour Reboot Min
Description Set the schedule profile mode. Possible profiles are: Profile1 Profile2 Profile3 Profile4 Allows user to set week day for defining PoE function by enabling it on the day.
Allows user to set what hour PoE function does by enabling it.
Allows user to set what minute PoE function does by enabling it.
Allows user to set what hour PoE function does by disabling it.
Allows user to set what minute PoE function does by disabling it.
Allows user to enable or disable the whole PoE port reboot by PoE reboot schedule. Please note that if you want PoE schedule and PoE reboot schedule to work at the same time, please use this function, and don't use Reboot Only function. This function offers administrator to reboot PoE device at an indicated time if administrator has this kind of requirement. Allows user to reboot PoE function by PoE reboot schedule. Please note that if administrator enables this function, PoE schedule will not set time to profile. This function is just for PoE port to reset at an indicated time. Allows user to set what hour PoE reboots. This function is only for PoE reboot schedule. Allows user to set what minute PoE reboots. This function is only for PoE reboot schedule.
Buttons
: Click to add new rule. : Click to apply changes : Check to delete the entry.
333
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.7.5 Alive Check Configuration
The GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series can be configured to monitor connected PD's status in real-time via ping action. Once the PD stops working and without response, the PoE Switch is going to restart PoE port power, and bring the PD back to work. It will greatly enhance the reliability and reduces administrator management burden.
This page provides you with how to configure PD Alive Check. The screen in Figure 4-7-7 appears.
Figure 4-7-7 PD Alive Check Configuration Screenshot
334
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object Mode Ping PD IP Address Interval Time (2~300s) Retry Count (1~5) Action
PD Reboot Time (5~180s)
Description Allows user to enable or disable per port PD Alive Check function. By default, all ports are disabled. This column allows user to set PoE device IP address for system making ping to the PoE device. Please note that the PD's IP address must be set to the same network segment with the PoE Switch. This column allows user to set how long system should issue a ping request to PD for detecting whether PD is alive or dead. Interval time range is from 2 seconds to 300 seconds. This column allows user to set the number of times system retries ping to PD. For example, if we set count 2, it means that if system retries ping to the PD and the PD doesn't response continuously, the PoE port will be reset. Allows user to set which action will be applied if the PD is without any response. The PoE Switch Series offers the following 3 actions:
PD Reboot: It means system will reset the PoE port that is connected to the PD.
PD Reboot & Alarm: It means system will reset the PoE port and issue an alarm message via Syslog.
Alarm: It means system will issue an alarm message via Syslog. This column allows user to set the PoE device rebooting time as there are so many kinds of PoE devices on the market and they have a different rebooting time.
The PD Alive-check is not a defining standard, so the PoE device on the market doesn't report reboot done information to the PoE Switch. Thus, user has to make sure how long the PD will take to finish booting, and then set the time value to this column.
System is going to check the PD again according to the reboot time. If you are not sure of the precise booting time, we suggest you set it longer.
Buttons : Click to apply changes.
335
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C Figure 4-7-8 PD Alive Check Configuration Screenshot
336
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.8 Maintenance
Use the Maintenance menu items to display and configure basic configurations of the GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series. Under
maintenance, the following two topics are provided:
Switch Maintenance
You can save the configuration, reboot or reset default, configuration
backup/restore of the switch on this page.
Diagnostics
You can run the cable diagnostics or ping IPv4/IPv6 IP address of the switch on this page.
4.8.1 Switch Maintenance
Under the switch maintenance, the following topics are provided to back up, upgrade, save and restore the configuration. This
section has the following items:
Save Configuration
You can save the configuration of the switch on this page.
Factory Default
You can reset default the configuration of the switch on this page.
Reboot Switch
You can restart the switch on this page. After restart, the switch will boot
Backup Manager
normally. You can back up the switch configuration.
Upgrade Manager
You can upgrade the switch configuration.
Dual Image
Select active or backup image on this Page.
4.8.1.1 Save Configuration
You can save the configuration of the switch on this page. The Factory Default screen in Figure 4-8-1 appears.
Buttons
Figure 4-8-1 Save Configuration Page Screenshot
: Click to apply changes.
337
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.8.1.2 Factory Default
You can reset the configuration default of the switch on this page. Only the IP configuration is retained. The new configuration is available immediately, which means that no restart is necessary. The Factory Default screen in Figure 4-8-2 appears and clicks to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults.
Figure 4-8-2 Factory Default Page Screenshot After the "Restore" button is pressed and rebooted, the system will load the default IP settings as follows:
Default IP address: 192.168.0.100 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway: 192.168.0.254 The other setting value is back to disable or none.
To reset the GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series to the Factory default setting, you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds. After the device be rebooted. You can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192.168.0.xx.
4.8.1.3 Reboot Switch
The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location. Once the Reboot button is pressed, user has to re-login the Web interface for about 60 seconds. The Reboot Switch screen in Figure 4-8-3 appears and clicks to reboot the system.
Figure 4-8-3 Reboot Switch Page Screenshot
338
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.8.1.4 Backup Manager
This function allows backup of the current image or configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station. The Backup Manager screen in Figure 4-8-4 appears.
Figure 4-8-4 Backup Manager Page Screenshot
The page includes the following fields:
Object Backup Method Server IP Backup Type Image
Description Select backup method for this drop down list. Fill in your TFTP server IP address. Select backup type. Select active or backup image.
Buttons : Click to back up image, configuration or log.
339
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.8.1.5 Upgrade Manager
This function allows reloading of the current image or configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station. The Upgrade Manager screen in Figure 4-8-5 appears.
Figure 4-8-5 Upgrade Manager Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Upgrade Method Server IP File Name Upgrade Type Image
Description Select upgrade method for this drop down list. Fill in your TFTP server IP address. The name of firmware image or configuration. Select upgrade type. Select active or backup image.
Buttons
: Click to upgrade image or configuration.
340
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.8.1.6 Dual Image
This page provides information about the active and backup firmware images in the device, and allows you to revert to the backup image. The web page displays two tables with information about the active and backup firmware images. The Dual Image Configuration and Information screens in Figure 4-8-6 & Figure 4-8-7 appear.
Figure 4-8-6 Dual Image Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Active Image
Description Select the active or backup image
Buttons : Click to apply active image.
Figure 4-8-7 Dual Image Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object
Flash Partition Image Name Image Size Created Time
Description
Display the current flash partition. Display the current image name. Display the current image size. Display the created time.
341
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.8.2 Diagnostics
This section provide the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshoot. The diagnostic tools are designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers.
Use the Diagnostics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series. The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues. The GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series transmits ICMP packets, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information: This section has the following items:
Cable Diagnostics Ping Test IPv6 Ping Test
You can run the cable diagnostics of the switch on this page. You can run the IPv4 IP address ping test of the switch on this page. You can run the IPv6 IP address ping test of the switch on this page.
4.8.2.1 Cable Diagnostics
The Cable Diagnostics performs tests on copper cables. These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and operating conditions, and to isolate a variety of common faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted-pair cabling. There might be two statuses as follow:
If the link is established on the twisted-pair interface in 1000BASE-T mode, the Cable Diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer.
If the link is established in 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T, the Cable Diagnostics cause the link to drop while the diagnostics are running.
After the diagnostics are finished, the link is reestablished. And the following functions are available.
Coupling between cable pairs. Cable pair termination Cable Length
Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length from 15 to 100 meters.
The Copper test and test result screens in Figure 4-8-8 & Figure 4-8-9 appear.
Figure 4-8-8 Copper Test Page Screenshot 342
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
The page includes the following fields:
Object Port
Description Select port for this drop down list.
Buttons
: Click to run the diagnostics
Figure 4-8-9 Test Results Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object Port Channel A~D Cable Length A~D Result
Description The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics. Display the current channel status. Display the current cable length. Display the test result.
343
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.8.2.2 Ping Test
This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues. After you press "Apply", ICMP packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs. The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4-8-10 appears.
The page includes the following fields:
Figure 4-8-10 ICMP Ping Page Screenshot
Object
IP Address Count Interval (in sec) Size (in bytes) Ping Results
Description
The destination IP Address. Number of echo requests to send. Send interval for each ICMP packet. The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 8bytes to 5120bytes. Display the current ping result.
Buttons
: Click to transmit ICMP packets. Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch, or you have to set up the correct gateway IP address.
344
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
4.8.2.3 IPv6 Ping Test
This page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues. After you press "Apply", 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs. The ICMPv6 Ping screen in Figure 4-8-11 appears.
Figure 4-8-11 ICMPv6 Ping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields:
Object
IPv6 Address Count Interval (in sec) Size (in bytes) Ping Results
Description
The destination IPv6 Address. Number of echo requests to send. Send interval for each ICMP packet. The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 8bytes to 5120bytes. Display the current ping result.
Buttons : Click to transmit ICMPv6 packets
345
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
5. COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
5.1 Accessing the CLI
When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server's console port, or via a Telnet connection, the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using the switch's command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system. This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI).
The following screen based on GS-4210-24UP4C will be the same as that of GS-4210-8UP2S and GS-4210-16UP4C.
Logon to the Console
Once the terminal is connected to the device, power on the GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series and the terminal will run self testing procedures. Then, the following message asks to login user name and password. The factory default user name and password are shown as follows and the login screen in Figure 5-1 appears.
Username: admin Password: admin 1. On"Username" &"Password"prompt, enter "admin". 2. The user can now enter commands to manage the GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series. For a detailed description of the commands, please refer to the following chapters.
Figure 5-1 GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series Console Login Screen 1. For security reason, please change and memorize the new password after this first setup. 2. Only accept command in lowercase letter under console interface.
346
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Configure IP address
The GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series is shipped with default IP address as follows: IP Address: 192.168.0.100 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
To check the current IP address or modify a new IP address for the GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series, please use the procedures as follows: Display of the current IP address
1. At the "GS-4210 Series#" prompt, enter "show ip". 2. The screen displays the current IP address, Subnet Mask and Gateway shown in Figure 5-2.
Configuration of the IP address
Figure 5-2 IP Information Screen
3. On " GS-4210 Series#" prompt, enter "configure".
4. On "GS-4210 Series(config)#" prompt, enter the following command and press <Enter> as shown in Figure 5-3.
GS-4210 Series(config)# ip address 192.168.1.100 mask 255.255.255.0 GS-4210 Series(config)# ip default-gateway 192.168.1.254
The previous command would apply the following settings for the Managed Switch. IP Address: 192.168.1.100 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Gateway: 192.168.1.254
Figure 5-3 Setting IP Address Screen 5. Repeat Step 1 to check if the IP address is changed. If the IP is successfully configured, the GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series will apply the new IP address setting immediately. You can access the Web interface of GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series through the new IP address.
If you do not familiar with console command or the related parameter, enter "?" anytime in console to get the help description.
347
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
5.2 Telnet Login
The GS-4210 802.3BT PoE++ Series also supports telnet for remote management. The Managed Switch asks for user name and password for remote login when using telnet, please use "admin" for username & password.
Figure 5-4 Telnet Login Screen
348
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6. Command Line Mode
The CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes according to the nature of the command. A sample of the CLI command modes are described below. Each of the command modes supports specific software commands.
The following screen based on GS-4210-24UP4C will be the same as that of GS-4210-16UP4C.
Mode-based Command Hierarchy The Command Line Interface (CLI) groups all the commands in appropriate modes by the nature of the commands. Examples of the CLI command modes are described below. Each of the command modes supports specific switch's commands. The CLI Command Modes table captures the command modes, the prompts visible in that mode and the exit method from that mode.
Command Mode User Mode Privileged Mode Global Config Mode
Access Method
Prompt
This is the first level of access.
Perform basic tasks and list
GS-4210-24UP4C >
system information.
From the User Mode, enter the GS-4210-24UP4C #
enable command.
From the Privileged Mode, enter the configuration command.
GS-4210-24UP4C (Config)#
Table 6-1 CLI Command Modes
Exit or Access Previous Mode
Enter exit command
To exit to the User Mode, enter exit . To exit to the Privileged Mode, enter the exit command.
The CLI is divided into various modes. The commands in one mode are not available until the operator switches to that particular mode. The commands available to the operator at any point in time depend upon the mode. Entering a question mark (?) at the CLI prompt, and displayss a list of the available commands and descriptions of the commands.
349
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C The CLI provides the following modes:
User Mode
When the operator logs into the CLI, the User Mode is the initial mode. The User Mode contains a limited set of commands. The command prompt shown at this level is:
Command Prompt: GS-4210-24UP4C >
Privileged Mode
To have access to the full suite of commands, the operator must enter the Privileged Mode. The Privileged Mode requires password authentication. From Privileged Mode, the operator can issue any Exec command to enter the Global Configuration mode. The command prompt shown at this level is:
Command Prompt: GS-4210-24UP4C #
Global Config Mode
This mode permits the operator to make modifications to the running configuration. General setup commands are grouped in this mode. From the Global Configuration mode, the operator can enter the Interface Configuration mode. The command prompt at this level is:
Command Prompt: GS-4210-24UP4C (Config)# From the Global Config mode, the operator may enter the following configuration modes:
6.1 User Mode Commands 6.1.1 enable command
Description: Turn on privileged mode command Syntax: enable Example: GS-4210-24UP4C> enable Password: GS-4210-24UP4C#
350
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.1.2 exit command
Description: Exit current mode and down to previous mode Syntax: exit Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# exit GS-4210-24UP4C>
6.1.3 ping command
Description: Send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network hosts Syntax: ping HOSTNAME (Host name) Example: GS-4210-24UP4C> ping 192.168.0.100 PING 192.168.0.100 (192.168.0.100): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 192.168.0.100: icmp_seq=0 ttl=64 time=0.0 ms 64 bytes from 192.168.0.100: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.0 ms 64 bytes from 192.168.0.100: icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.0 ms 64 bytes from 192.168.0.100: icmp_seq=3 ttl=64 time=0.0 ms --- 192.168.0.100 ping statistics --4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 0.0/0.0/0.0 ms GS-4210-24UP4C>
6.1.4 Show Command
show arp
Description: Show the IP ARP translation table Syntax: show arp
Example:
GS-4210-24UP4C> show arp
Address
HWtype HWaddress
192.168.0.100
ether C8:9C:DC:EC:D6:DD
GS-4210-24UP4C>
Flags Mask C
Iface eth0
351
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
show history
Description: List the last several history commands Syntax: show history Example: GS-4210-24UP4C> show history
show info
Description: Show basic information Syntax: show info Example: GS-4210-24UP4C> show info
show ip
Description: Show the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway Syntax: show ip Example: GS-4210-24UP4C> show ip IP Address: 192.168.0.100 Subnet Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway: 192.168.0.254 GS-4210-24UP4C>
show privilege
Description: Show the local user privilege level Syntax: show privilege Example: GS-4210-24UP4C> show privilege Current CLI Username: admin Current CLI Privilege: 15 GS-4210-24UP4C>
352
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
show version
Description: Show the system hardware and software status Syntax: show version
Example:
GS-4210-24UP4C> show version
Loader Version : 1.0.0.48161
Loader Date
: Jan 13 2020 - 15:18:03
Firmware Version : 2.305b200122
Firmware Date : Jan 22 2020 - 14:49:27
GS-4210-24UP4C>
6.1.5 terminal command
Description: Terminal configuration Syntax: terminal length <0-24> Length value. 0 means no limit Example: GS-4210-24UP4C> terminal length 0
6.2 Privileged Mode Commands
6.2.1 clear command
clear arp
Description: Clear entries in the ARP cache Syntax: clear arp A.B.C.D (IP address to clear) clear arp (the entire ARP cache is cleared) Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# clear arp 192.168.0.100 GS-4210-24UP4C# GS-4210-24UP4C# clear arp GS-4210-24UP4C#
353
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
clear gvrp
Description: Clear the GVRP configuration Syntax: clear GVRP error-statistics (GVRP Error Statistics information) clear GVRP statistics (GVRP Statistics information) Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# clear gvrp error-statistics GS-4210-24UP4C# clear gvrp statistics GS-4210-24UP4C#
clear interfaces
Description: Clear the Interface status and configuration Syntax: clear interface LAG <1-8> counters clear interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-26> counters Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# clear interfaces lag 1 counters GS-4210-24UP4C# clear interfaces GigabitEthernet 1 counters GS-4210-24UP4C#
clear ip arp
Description: Clear the IP configuration Syntax: clear ip arp inspection interfaces LAG <1-8> statistics clear ip arp inspection interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-26> statistics Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ip arp inspection interfaces lag 1 statistics GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ip arp inspection interfaces GigabitEthernet 1 statistics GS-4210-24UP4C#
354
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
clear ip arp
Description: Clear the IP configuration Syntax: clear ip arp inspection interfaces LAG <1-8> statistics clear ip arp inspection interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-26> statistics Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ip arp inspection interfaces lag 1 statistics GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ip arp inspection interfaces GigabitEthernet 1 statistics GS-4210-24UP4C#
clear ip dhcp
Description: Clear the DHCP configuration Syntax: clear ip dhcp snooping database statistics clear ip dhcp snooping interfaces LAG <1-8> statistics clear ip dhcp snooping interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-26> statistics Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ip dhcp snooping database statistics GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ip dhcp snooping interfaces lag 1 statistics GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ip dhcp snooping interface GigabitEthernet 1 statistics GS-4210-24UP4C#
clear ip igmp
Description: Clear the IGMP configuration Syntax: clear ip igmp snooping groups dynamic/static clear ip igmp snooping statistics clear ip dhcp snooping vlan x static-mac xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ip igmp snooping groups dynamic GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ip igmp snooping groups static GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ip igmp snooping statistics GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static-mac 00:30-4F:00:00:01 GS-4210-24UP4C#
355
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
clear ipv6
Description: Clear the ipv6 information Syntax: clear ipv6 mld snooping groups dynamic/static clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics clear ipv6 mld snooping vlan x static-mac xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ipv6 mld snooping groups dynamic GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ipv6 mld snooping groups static GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics GS-4210-24UP4C# clear ipv6 mld snooping vlan 1 static-mac 00:30:4F:00:00:01 GS-4210-24UP4C#
clear line
Description: Clear identify a specific line for configuration Syntax: clear line ssh/telnet Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# clear line ssh GS-4210-24UP4C# clear line telnet GS-4210-24UP4C#
clear lldp
Description: Clear lldp configuration Syntax: clear line lldp statistics Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# clear lldp statistics GS-4210-24UP4C#
356
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
clear logging
Description: Clear log configuration Syntax: clear logging buffered/flash Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# clear logging buffered GS-4210-24UP4C# clear logging flash GS-4210-24UP4C#
clear mac
Description: Clear MAC configuration Syntax: clear mac address-table dynamic interface lag x clear mac address-table dynamic interface GigabitEthernet x clear mac address-table dynamic vlan x Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# clear mac address-table dynamic interfaces lag 1 GS-4210-24UP4C# clear mac address-table dynamic interfaces GigabitEthernet 1 GS-4210-24UP4C# clear mac address-table dynamic vlan 1 GS-4210-24UP4C#
clear rmon
Description: Clear RMON information Syntax: clear rmon interfaces lag x statistics clear rmon interfaces GigabitEthernet x statistics Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# clear rmon interfaces lag 1 statistics GS-4210-24UP4C# clear rmon interfaces GigabitEthernet 1 statistics GS-4210-24UP4C#
357
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.2.2 clock command
Description: Manage the system clock Syntax: clock set HH:MM:SS:Month: Date: Year Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# clock set 13:36:00 jul 3 2014 13:36:00 DFL(UTC+8) Jul 03 2014 GS-4210-24UP4C#
6.2.3 configure command
Description: Enter Global Config mode Syntax: configure Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# configure GS-4210-24UP4C(config)#
6.2.4 copy command
Description: Copy from one file to another Syntax: copy backup-config/flash:///running-config/startup-config/tftp:// running-config/startup-config/tftp:// Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# copy running-config startup-config Success GS-4210-24UP4C#
358
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.2.5 debug command
Description: Debug Options Syntax: debug acl all/common/reserve/user-defined Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# debug acl all GS-4210-24UP4C# debug acl common GS-4210-24UP4C# debug acl reserve GS-4210-24UP4C# debug acl user-defined GS-4210-24UP4C#
6.2.6 delete command
Description: Delete a file from the flash file system Syntax: delete backup-config/flash:///startup-config/system image x Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# delete backup-config GS-4210-24UP4C# delete flash:// GS-4210-24UP4C# delete startup-config GS-4210-24UP4C# delete system image 0 GS-4210-24UP4C#
6.2.7 disable command
Description: Turn off privileged mode command Syntax: disable Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# disable GS-4210-24UP4C>
359
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.2.8 end command
Description: End current mode and change to enable mode Syntax: end Example: GS-4210-24UP4C(config)# end GS-4210-24UP4C#
6.2.9 exit command
Description: Exit current mode and down to previous mode Syntax: exit Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# exit GS-4210-24UP4C>
6.2.10 ping command
Description: Send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network hosts Syntax: ping HOSTNAME (Host name) Example: GS-4210-24UP4C> ping 192.168.0.100 PING 192.168.0.100 (192.168.0.100): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 192.168.0.100: icmp_seq=0 ttl=64 time=0.0 ms 64 bytes from 192.168.0.100: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.0 ms 64 bytes from 192.168.0.100: icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.0 ms 64 bytes from 192.168.0.100: icmp_seq=3 ttl=64 time=0.0 ms --- 192.168.0.100 ping statistics --4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 0.0/0.0/0.0 ms GS-4210-24UP4C>
360
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.2.11 reboot command
Description: Halt and perform a cold restart Syntax: reboot Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# reboot *Jul 03 14:22:09: %System-4: System reboot
6.2.12 renew command
Description: RenewIP configuration Syntax: renew ip dhcp snooping database Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# renew ip dhcp snooping database GS-4210-24UP4C#
6.2.13 restore-defaults command
Description: Restore to default Syntax: restore-defaults Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# restore-defaults Restore Default Success. Do you want to reboot now? (y/n)y Rebooting now... *Jan 01 08:16:00: %System-4: System reboot
6.2.14 save command
Description: Save running configuration to flash Syntax: save Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# save Success GS-4210-24UP4C#
361
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.2.15 show command
Description: Show running system information Syntax:
show specific item
Example:
GS-4210-24UP4C# show version
Loader Version : 1.0.0.48161
Loader Date
: Jan 13 2020 - 15:18:03
Firmware Version : 2.305b200122
Firmware Date : Jan 22 2020 - 14:49:27
GS-4210-24UP4C#
6.2.16 ssl command
Description: Setup SSL host keys Syntax:
ssl
Example:
GS-4210-24UP4C# ssl Generating a 1024 bit RSA private key ............................++++++ writing new private key to '/mnt/ssh/ssl_key.pem' You are about to be asked to enter information that will be incorporated into your certificate request. What you are about to enter is what is called a Distinguished Name or a DN. There are quite a few fields but you can leave some blank For some fields there will be a default value, If you enter '.', the field will be left blank. Country Name (2 letter code) [AU]:2 string is too short, it needs to be at least 2 bytes long Country Name (2 letter code) [AU]:TW State or Province Name (full name) [Some-State]:TW Locality Name (eg, city) []:Taipei Organization Name (eg, company) [Internet Widgits Pty Ltd]:PLANET Organizational Unit Name (eg, section) []:GS-4210-24UP4C Common Name (e.g. server FQDN or YOUR name) []:Marc Email Address []:marcl@planet.com.tw GS-4210-24UP4C#
362
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.2.17 terminal command
Description: Terminal configuration Syntax: terminal length<0-24> Length value. 0 means no limit Example: GS-4210-24UP4C# terminal length 0 GS-4210-24UP4C#
363
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.3 Global Config Mode Commands
6.3.1 aaa Command
Description: AAA (Authentication, Authorization, Accounting) Syntax: aaa accounting commands/exec/system/update aaa authentication enable/login
6.3.2 boot Command
Description: Booting Operations Syntax: boot host auto-config boot system image0/1
6.3.3 clock Command
Description: Manage the system clock Syntax: clock source local/sntp clock summer-time clock timezone
6.3.4 dos Command
Description: DoS information Syntax: dos daeqsa-deny icmp-frag-pkts-deny icmp-ping-max-length icmpv4-ping-max-check icmpv6-ping-max-check ipv6-min-frag-size-check ipv6-min-frag-size-length
Destination MAC equals to source MAC Fragmented ICMP packets DoS information Check ICMPv4 ping maximum packets size Check ICMPv6 ping maximum packets size Check minimum size of IPv6 fragments DoS information
364
land-deny nullscan-deny pod-deny smurf-deny smurf-netmask syn-sportl1024-deny synfin-deny synrst-deny tcp-frag-off-min-check tcpblat-deny tcphdr-min-check tcphdr-min-length udpblat-deny xma-deny
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
Source IP equals to destination IP NULL Scan Attacks Ping of Death Attacks Smurf Attacks DoS information SYN packets with sport less than 1024 SYN and FIN bits set in the packet SYNC and RST bits set in the packet TCP fragment packet with offset equals to one Source TCP port equals to destination TCP port Check minimum TCP header DoS information Source UDP port equals to destination UDP port Xmascan: sequence number is zero and the FIN, URG and PSH bits are set
6.3.5 dot1x Command
Description: 802.1x configuration Syntax: dot1x guest-vlan<1-4094> VLAN ID (e.g. 100)
6.3.6 do Command
Description: To run exec commands in current mode Syntax: do SEQUENCE (Exec Command)
6.3.7 enable Command
Description: Local Enable Password Syntax: enable password/privilege/secret
365
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.3.8 end Command
Description: End current mode and change to enable mode Syntax: end
6.3.9 errdisable Command
Description: Error Disable Syntax: errdisable recovery cause/interval
6.3.10 exit Command
Description: Exit current mode and down to previous mode Syntax: Exit
6.3.11 fpga Command
Description:
fpga i2c information
Syntax:
fpga debug
<0x00-0xFF> register
led
led
set
set
6.3.12 gvrp Command
Description: GVRP configuration Syntax: gvrp time join/leave/leaveall
366
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.3.13 hostname Command
Description: Set system's network name Syntax: hostname WORD (this system's network name)
6.3.14 interface Command
Description: Select an interface to configure Syntax: Interface GigabitEthernet/LAG/range
6.3.15 ip Command
Description:
IP configuration
Syntax:
Ip
acl This command creates an ACL, which perform classification on layer 3 fields and enters ip-access configuration mode.
address
IPv4 Address
arp
ARP configuration
default-gateway Set default gateway IP address
dhcp
DHCP configuration
dns
Domin Name Server
http
HTTP server configuration
https
HTTPS server configuration
igmp
IGMP Configuration
source
IP Source Guard Configuration
ssh
SSH (Secure Shell) configuration
telnet
Telnet daemon configuration
367
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.3.16 ipv6 Command
Description:
IPV6 configuration
Syntax:
ipv6
acl This command creates an ACL, which perform classification onlayer 3 fields and enters to ipv6-access configuration mode.
address
Set IPv6 address and prefix
autoconfig
Enable Ipv6 auto-configuration
default-gateway Set IPv6 gateway
dhcp
Set IPv6 DHCP Client
mld
MLD Configuration
6.3.17 jumbo-frame Command
Description: Jumbo Frame configuration Syntax: jumbo-frame <64-9216> (Maximum frame size)
6.3.18 lacp Command
Description: LACP Configuration Syntax: lacp system-priority <1-65535> (LACP system priority)
6.3.19 lag Command
Description: Link Aggregation Group Configuration Syntax: lag load-balance src-dst-mac/src-dst-mac-ip
6.3.20 line Command
Description: To identify a specific line for configuration Syntax: line console/ssh/telnet
368
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.3.21 lldp Command
Description: LLDP Configuration Syntax: lldp holdtime-multiplier lldpdu med reinit-delay tx-delay tx-interval
Configure LLDP holdtime multiplier Configure LLDP PDU handling when LLDP is disabled LLDP MED configuration Configure LLDP reinitialization delay Configure LLDP TX delay Configure LLDP transmission interval
6.3.22 logging Command
Description:
Log Configuration
Syntax:
logging
buffered RAM
flash Flash
host
Remote syslog host
6.3.23 mac Command
Description:
MAC Configuration
Syntax:
mac
acl
This command enters the extended MAC ACL configuration in order to create layer 2 extended ACL.
address-table MAC address table configuration
6.3.24 management-vlan Command
Description: Management VLAN configuration Syntax: management-vlan vlan <1-4094> VLAN ID (e.g. 100)
369
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.3.25 mirror Command
Description: Mirror configuration Syntax: mirror session <1-4> Session ID (e.g. 1-4)configuraton destination/source interface/GigabitEthernet <1-26> GigabitEthernet device number
6.3.26 no Command
Description: Negate command Syntax: no
6.3.27 poe Command
Description:
This command provide PoE configuration
Syntax:
poe
admin-mode
Configure System PoE Admin mode information
command
command
legacy
PoE legacy mode
limit-mode
Configure System PoE power limit mode information
mode
Select the port poe mode function (endsapn/midspan/upoe
/bt)
pdalive-add
Add PoE PD alive check
port
Enable/Disable/Schedule the port PoE injects function
power-limit
Enable per port power output limit
power_budget
Configure System PoE power budget information
priority
Set PoE priority for the power supply management
schedule-add
Add PoE schedule list
schedule-delete
Delete PoE schedule list
schedule-profile
Select PoE schedule profile
temperature_threshold Configure System PoE temperature threshold information
370
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.3.28 port-security Command
Description: Port security Configuration Syntax: port-security
6.3.29 qos Command
Description:
Enable/Disable QoS on the device and enter the QoS mode (advance/basic)
Syntax:
qos
advanced
Enable/Disable QoS on the device and enter the QoS mode (advance/basic).
advanced-mode Set the trust mode when the default action is ports-trusted in advanced mode.
aggregate-policer Configure a policer that can be applied to multiple classes within the same policy map. Use the no form of
the command to remove policer.
basic
Set system QoS advance mode.
map
Configure the QoS maps.
queue
Queue configuration
trust
Configure the global trust mode . Use the no form to return untrusted state.
6.3.30 radius Command
Description: RADIUS server information Syntax: radius default-config/host
6.3.31 rmon Command
Description: RMON information Syntax: rmon alarm/event/history
371
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.3.32 Snmp Command
Description:
SNMP information
Syntax:
snmp
community Set community or security name string
engineid
SNMP engine id setting
group
Set access group string
host
Trap or inform host
trap
Snmp class trap setting
user
Set user Settings
view
Set view string
6.3.33 sntp Command
Description: Simple Network Time Protocol Syntax: sntp host
6.3.34 spanning-tree Command
Description:
Spanning-tree configuration
Syntax:
Spanning-tree
bpdu
action for bpdu packet
forward-delay
Sets the forward-delay parameter
hello-time
Sets the hello-time parameter
max-hops
Sets the max-hops parameter
maximum-age
Changes the interval between messages the spanning tree receive s from the root switch
mode
Spanning tree protocol type
mst
Multiple spanning tree configuration
pathcost
Spanning tree path-cost method
priority
Sets the priority for specified instance
tx-hold-count
Set spanning-tree tx hold count, in seconds
372
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.3.35 storm-control Command
Description: Storm control configuration Syntax: Storm-control ifg Interframe configuration unit Unit configuration
6.3.36 system Command
Description: System information Syntax: contact Set host contact location Set host location name Set host name
6.3.37 tacacs Command
Description:
TACACS+ server information
Syntax:
tacacs
default-config TACACS+ server default parameters
host
TACACS+ server host
6.3.38 username Command
Description:
Local User Configuration
Syntax:
username USERNAME Local user name
nopassword No password for this user
password Use clear text password
privilege Local user privilege level
secret
Use encrypted password
373
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
6.3.39 vlan Command
Description:
VLAN Configuration
Syntax:
vlan
VLAN-LIST
VLAN List (e.g. 3,6-8): The range of VLAN ID is 1 to 4094
protocol-vlan 802.1v protocol VLAN configuration
6.3.40 voice-vlan Command
Description: Voice VLAN Configuration Syntax: voice vlan <1-4094> (Specifies the Voice VLAN Identifier)
374
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
7. SWITCH OPERATION
7.1 Address Table
The Switch is implemented with an address table. This address table is composed of many entries. Each entry is used to store the address information of some nodes on the network, including MAC address, port no, etc. This information comes from the learning process of Ethernet Switch.
7.2 Learning
When one packet comes in from any port, the Switch will record the source address, port number and the other related information in the address table. This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets.
7.3 Forwarding & Filtering
When one packet comes from some port of the Ethernet Switching, it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning. The Ethernet Switching will look up the address table for the destination address. If not found, this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port, which this packet comes in. And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected. If found, and the destination address is located at a different port from this packet comes in, the Ethernet Switching will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from the address table. But, if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet, then this packet will be filtered, thereby increasing the network throughput and availability
7.4 Store-and-Forward
Store-and-Forward is one type of packet-forwarding techniques. A Store-and-Forward Ethernet Switching stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer and does the complete error checking before transmission. Therefore, no error packets occur. It is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability.
The Ethernet Switch scans the destination address from the packet-header, searches the routing table provided for the incoming port and forwards the packet, only if required. The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network, thereby increasing throughput and availability. However, the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs, which nearly always improves the overall performance. An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to significantly boost bandwidth using the conventional cabling and adapters.
Due to the learning function of the Ethernet switching, the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet is stored in a routing table. This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address. This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduces the overall load on the network.
The Switch performs "Store and forward"; therefore, no error packets occur. More reliably, it reduces the re-transmission rate. No packet loss will occur.
375
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
7.5 Auto-Negotiation
The STP ports on the Switch have a built-in "Auto-negotiation". This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device (usually at Power On or Reset). This is done by detecting the modes and speeds when both devices are connected. Both 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX devices can connect with the port in either half- or full-duplex mode.
If attached device is: 10Mbps, without auto-negotiation 10Mbps, with auto-negotiation 100Mbps, without auto-negotiation 100Mbps, with auto-negotiation
100BASE-TX port will set to: 10Mbps. 10/20Mbps (10BASE-T/full-duplex) 100Mbps 100/200Mbps (100BASE-TX/full-duplex)
376
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
8. TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter contains information to help you solve your issue. If the Managed Switch is not functioning properly, make sure the Managed Switch is set up according to instructions in this manual. The Link LED is not lit
Solution: Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Managed Switch Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port Solution: Please check the VLAN settings, trunk settings, or port enabled / disabled status. Performance is bad Solution: Check the full duplex status of the Managed Switch. If the Managed Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex, then the performance will be poor. Please also check the in/out rate of the port. Why the Switch doesn't connect to the network Solution:
1. Check the LNK/ACT LED on the Managed Switch 2. Try another port on the Managed Switch 3. Make sure the cable is installed properly 4. Make sure the cable is the right type 5. Turn off the power. After a while, turn on power again 100BASE-TX port link LED is lit, but the traffic is irregular Solution: Check that the attached device is not set to full duplex. Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes. Auto-negotiation may not recognize this type of full-duplex setting.
Switch does not power up Solution: 1. AC power cord is not inserted or faulty 2. Check whether the AC power cord is inserted correctly 3. Replace the power cord if the cord is inserted correctly. Check whether the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch. 4. If that device works, refer to the next step. 5. If that device does not work, check the AC power
377
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C Why the PoE Ethernet Switch doesn't connect to the network
Solution: Check the LNK/ACT LED on the PoE Ethernet Switch. Try another port on the PoE Ethernet Switch. Make sure the cable is installed properly and make sure the cable is the right type. Turn off the power. After a while, turn on power again.
When I connect my PoE device to PoE Ethernet Switch, it cannot be powered on Solution: 1. Please check the cable type of the connection from the PoE Ethernet Switch (port 1 to port 8) to the other end. The cable should be an 8-wire UTP, Category 5 or above, EIA568 cable within 100 meters. A cable with only 4-wire, short loop or over 100 meters will affect the power supply. 2. Please check and assure the device is fully complied with IEEE 802.3af / 802.3at standard.
378
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C
APPENDIX A Switch's RJ45 Pin Assignments
A.1 1000Mbps, 1000BASE-T
Contact 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MDI BI_DA+ BI_DABI_DB+ BI_DC+ BI_DCBI_DBBI_DD+ BI_DD-
MDI-X BI_DB+ BI_DBBI_DA+ BI_DD+ BI_DDBI_DABI_DC+ BI_DC-
Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted-pair cable, or at a wiring panel, while not expressly forbidden, is beyond the scope of this standard.
A.2 10/100Mbps, 10/100BASE-TX
When connecting your 10/100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch, a bridge or a hub, a straight or crossover cable is necessary. Each port of the Switch supports auto-MDI/MDI-X detection. That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable. The following table and diagram show the standard RJ45 receptacle/ connector and their pin assignments:
Contact
1 2 3 4, 5 6 7, 8
RJ45 Connector pin assignment
MDI
MDI-X
Media Dependent Interface
Media Dependent
Interface-Cross
Tx + (transmit)
Rx + (receive)
Tx - (transmit)
Rx - (receive)
Rx + (receive)
Tx + (transmit)
Not used
Rx - (receive)
Tx - (transmit)
Not used
379
User's Manual of GS-4210-8UP2S/GS-4210-16UP4C/GS-4210-24UP4C The standard cable, RJ45 pin assignment
The standard RJ45 receptacle/connector
There are 8 wires on a standard UTP/STP cable and each wire is color-coded. The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection:
Straight-through Cable
SIDE 1
12345678
SIDE 1
1 = White / Orange 2 = Orange
3 = White / Green
4 = Blue
5 = White / Blue
12345678
6 = Green 7 = White / Brown
SIDE 2
8 = Brown
Crossover Cable
SIDE 1
12345678
SIDE 1
1 = White / Orange 2 = Orange
3 = White / Green
4 = Blue
5 = White / Blue
12345678
6 = Green 7 = White / Brown
SIDE 2
8 = Brown
Figure A-1: Straight-through and Crossover Cable
SIDE 2 1 = White / Orange 2 = Orange 3 = White / Green 4 = Blue 5 = White / Blue 6 = Green 7 = White / Brown 8 = Brown SIDE 2 1 = White / Green 2 = Green 3 = White / Orange 4 = Blue 5 = White / Blue 6 = Orange 7 = White / Brown 8 = Brown
Please make sure your connected cables are with the same pin assignment and color as the above table before deploying the cables into your network.
380
Marc Liao Microsoft Word 2016